MultiCharts User Manual
MultiCharts User Manual
Contents
Charts ................................................................................................................. 10
MultiCharts Work Area ...................................................................................................................................10
Understanding Chart Window ........................................................................................................................21
Creating Charts ...............................................................................................................................................22
Volume Analysis ..............................................................................................................................................30
Volume Profile ................................................................................................................................................30
Go To Specified Bar .........................................................................................................................................36
Chart Window..................................................................................................... 76
Background .....................................................................................................................................................76
Chart Appearance ...........................................................................................................................................77
PowerLanguage................................................................................................ 409
Language Elements ........................................................................................... 409
How Scripts Work ............................................................................................. 412
Indicators ......................................................................................................................................................412
Signals ...........................................................................................................................................................414
FAQ................................................................................................................... 453
MultiCharts must be run with Administrator Priviliges in order to register a new Data Feed ..................453
Collecting and Saving Data to MultiCharts ...................................................................................................453
Compilation Error (errLine 0, errColumn 0, errLine End 0, errColumnEnd 0) ...............................................455
Creating Custom Futures Using ASCII Import ...............................................................................................457
Custom Criteria Optimization .......................................................................................................................457
Data feed could not be loaded Error Message ..........................................................................................458
Floating-Point Division by Zero Error Message ..........................................................................................458
Getting Started Wizard .................................................................................................................................459
Global Variables ............................................................................................................................................459
Help About MultiCharts Error ....................................................................................................................459
How Signals are Calculated ...........................................................................................................................460
How to Backup User Data .............................................................................................................................460
How to Collect Dumps ..................................................................................................................................462
How to Configure a Proxy Connection .........................................................................................................463
How to Connect Multiple Interactive Brokers Profiles .................................................................................463
How to Connect to a Data Feed or a Broker .................................................................................................464
How to Get Data from FXCM (MCFX data feed) and Set Up for Trading on FXCM .......................................464
How to Install an Updater .............................................................................................................................466
How to Make Indicator and Signal Calculation results the Same .................................................................466
How to Migrate from MultiCharts 32 bit to MultiCharts 64 bit ....................................................................467
How to Move MultiCharts Database, Studies and Logs from C Drive ...........................................................469
How to Reduce Database Size .......................................................................................................................471
How to Solve Digital Rights Management System Connection Problem ......................................................472
How to Use Your License on Two Computers at the Same Time ..................................................................472
Incompatible Version of Tsstorage.dll in Module Shaper Error ....................................................................472
Interactive Brokers Pacing Violation .............................................................................................................473
Is there a TPO or Market Profile indicator in MultiCharts? ..........................................................................473
MultiCharts Logs ...........................................................................................................................................473
MultiCharts Processes...................................................................................................................................475
Pre-built Studies in MultiCharts ....................................................................................................................476
Problems with Data in MultiCharts ...............................................................................................................482
Reasons of Order Rejection ..........................................................................................................................485
Spread and Pair Trading ................................................................................................................................486
Symbol Guide ................................................................................................................................................487
Charts
MultiCharts Work Area
The application window consists of Toolbars, Workspaces, and Windows (Chart , Scanner, Order and Position
Tracker, DOM, Time and Sales).
For detailed information about Windows, click here.
Understanding Workspaces
Workspaces help manage the working process. Several Workspaces can be open at the same time. It is possible to
create, save, open, close, rename, and delete Workspaces, as well as to switch between Workspaces that are open
in the application window. Each Workspace can contain multiple windows.
Names of all open Workspaces are shown in the tabs at the bottom of application window. The tab of the currently
selected (active) Workspace is highlighted. To switch to another open Workspace click the tab of the Workspace you
wish to switch to.
To achieve peak performance limit the number of simultaneously open workspaces to the ones you actually need.
Creating Workspaces
To create a new Workspace, click the New Workspace
Workspaces can also be created by using the Ctrl + N hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu, then pointing
to New and clicking New Workspace.
Note: If there are no open Workspaces when a new Chart Window is created, a new Workspace for that window
will be created automatically.
Saving Workspaces
A Workspace, complete with Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Windows and all
settings, is saved as a file with .wsp extension.
To save a Workspace, click the Save Workspace
the Ctrl + S hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Save Workspace.
If the Workspace has not yet been named, the Save As dialog box will appear, allowing to choose a file name for the
workspace.
In order to save an already named Workspace under a new name, select File in the main menu and click Save
Workspace As.
To save Workspaces automatically on application exit, see Workspaces Preferences.
Opening Workspaces
Saved Workspaces can be opened by using Windows Explorer/File manager as well as from the application.
10
dialog box that appears, navigate to and select the Workspace file (.wsp extension) and click the Open button.
Workspaces can also be opened by using the Ctrl + O hot key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
Open Workspace.
Recently used Workspaces can be opened by clicking the down-arrow to the right of the Open Workspace
icon
on the Main toolbar and then clicking a Workspace name, or by selecting File in the main menu, then pointing to
Recent Workspaces and clicking a Workspace name.
To open Workspaces automatically on application startup, see Workspaces Preferences.
Closing Workspaces
To close a Workspace, click the Close Workspace
using the F4 key, or by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Close Workspace.
If any changes have been made to a Workspace since it was last saved, and: Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog
on Exit checkbox in Workspace Preferences is not selected, the Save Workspace dialog box will appear:
-
click Cancel to cancel the operation and keep the Workspace open.
To disable the dialog box and close workspaces without confirmation, see Workspaces Preferences.
Important:
If both the Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog on Exit checkbox and Do not save workspaces option are selected
in the Workspace tab of the Preferences window then no changes to the workspace will be saved on exit!
Renaming Workspaces
Workspaces can be renamed by two different methods:
Save a copy of the Workspace under a different name. See Saving Workspaces; or:
Use Windows Explorer or another program to rename a Workspace file as any other Windows file.
Note: Workspaces that are open cannot be renamed by Windows Explorer. Close the Workspace prior to renaming
it.
Deleting Workspaces
Use Windows Explorer or another program to delete the Workspace file as you would any other Windows file.
Deleting a Workspace does not delete the data or the studies.
Note: A Workspace that is open cannot be deleted. Close the Workspace prior to deleting it.
Workspaces Preferences
Workspaces preferences settings determine which workspaces, if any, will be opened on application startup,
whether changes to workspaces will be saved on application exit, and if a confirmation prompt will appear when
Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Windows are closed.
To set workspace preferences:
1.
Open the Preferences window by selecting File in the main menu and then clicking Preferences; the window
2.
3.
To open Workspaces on startup, select the Open Workspaces on Start checkbox; clear the checkbox to not
To show the Workspaces dialog box on startup, select the Show the dialog checkbox; clear the checkbox to
6.
To show Save Workspace dialog box on exit, clear the Do not show "Save Workspace" dialog on Exit checkbox;
Select Save workspaces or Do not save workspaces to save or not to save the workspaces on exit, respectively.
8.
To prompt for a confirmation when a Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window
is closed (deleted), clear the Do not prompt for confirmation when I want to close a window checkbox; check the
checkbox to prompt for a confirmation when a window is closed.
Creating Windows
A Chart Window is always created at the same time as the chart/grid that is placed in it. It is not possible to create
an empty window, without a chart/grid. A Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window
is always created in the currently selected Workspace.
Read more about Creating Charts
Read more about Workspaces.
Select Window in the main menu and click the name of the window.
Color change of the window's title bar will indicate that the window has become active.
12
By default, Windows are displayed within a Workspace. Windows can be detached from a Workspace and positioned
anywhere on your computer's desktop; on a multiple-monitor system, one or more Windows can be displayed on
each monitor.
A Window can be detached by one of the following methods:
or:
Note: Detached windows' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is
started A Window can be attached back to the Workspace by one of the following methods:
or:
.
utton again; the button will change to
Note: Detached window's last chosen Always on Top status is retained the next time that the application is started.
Arranging Windows
It is possible to arrange windows in any order. A Window can be positioned anywhere by placing the mouse pointer
over the window's title bar, holding the left mouse button, and dragging the window to the desired position.
Windows within a workspace can also be arranged automatically:
To arrange all open windows for convenient viewing select Window in the main menu and click Arrange All
any minimized windows will be placed at the bottom of the Workspace, below any open windows.
To arrange all windows horizontally or vertically select Window in the main menu and click Arrange
To arrange all open windows in a cascade select Window in the main menu and click Cascade; any minimized
windows will be placed at the bottom of the Workspace, below any open windows.
Note: Windows' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is started.
Deleting Windows
A window can be deleted from a Workspace. To close a Window means to delete it. It is possible to delete all of the
windows from a Workspace, leaving the Workspace empty.
To delete a Window from a Workspace click the Close button on the title bar of the window; in the dialog box that
appears, click Yes to delete the window, or click Cancel to cancel the operation and keep the window open.
To disable the dialog box and delete windows without confirmation, see Workspaces Preferences.
Within a Workspace you can switch between the open windows by using the Ctrl + F6 hotkey combination, or by
clicking anywhere on the window you wish to switch to.
Copying Windows
The active Chart/Scanner/Order and Position Tracker/DOM/Time and Sales Window can be copied, complete with
all settings, data series, and studies, and pasted to any open Workspace.
To copy an active window use one of the following methods:
Select File in the main menu and click Copy Window; or:
Select File in the main menu and click Paste Window, or:
Understanding Toolbars
Toolbars provide convenient access to commonly used functions. These functions can also be accessed by using the
menus, but the toolbars let you do it with just one click.
There are six toolbars: Chart Analysis, Command Line, Control, Drawing, Main, and Resolution. Any of the toolbars
can be made floating, allowing them to be positioned anywhere, or hidden if they are not needed.
icon.
Position the mouse pointer over the toolbar's move handle; hold the left mouse button and drag the toolbar
Double-click the toolbar's title bar. The toolbar will dock along the top border of the application window; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the title bar of a floating toolbar; hold the left mouse button and drag the
toolbar to any of the four borders of the application window. Once the mouse pointer comes close to a border of
14
the window, an outline will indicate where the toolbar will be docked. Releasing the mouse button will dock the
toolbar.
Note: Toolbars' last chosen positions are retained the next time that the application is started.
Creating Workspaces
Save Workspace
Saving Workspace
Open Workspace
Opening Workspace
Close Workspace
Closing Workspace
Creating Charts
New QuoteManager
Understanding QuoteManager
Move Up
Move Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Increase Weight
Decrease Weight
Zoom In
Zooming In
Zoom Out
Zooming Out
Reset Scales
15
Hide Object
Hiding Indicators
Chart Analysis Toolbar
Insert Symbol
Insert Study
Inserting Studies
Format Instruments
Changing Symbols
Format Window
Chart Appearance
Bar Chart
Arrow Pointer
Pointer
Cross Pointer
Cross Pointer
Show/Hide Cross
Cross Mode
Cross Mode
Data Window
Data Window
Resolution Toolbar
Tick Bar
Volume Bar
Range Bar
Second Bar
Minute Bar
Hourly Bar
Daily Bar
Weekly Bar
Monthly Bar
Quarterly Bar
Yearly Bar
Trend Line
Horizontal Line
Time Line
Regression Channel
16
Equidistant Channel
Andrews' Pitchfork
Gann Fan
Gann Square
Retracement Calculator
Text
Inserting Text
Rectangle
Inserting Rectangle
Ellipse
Inserting Ellipse
Arc
Inserting Arc
Arrow Down
Arrow Up
Inserting Arrow Up
Command Line Toolbar
Resolution
Command Line
Playback Resolution
Jump To Time
Jump To Bar
Step Backward
Step Forward
Pause/Resume Playback
Global Mode
17
ResSize ResName
Changes resolution of the symbol plotted as data series 1 of the active chart to a specified one.
.at_toggle
Turns on/off auto trading on the active chart.
.shs
Switches between different styles for Hint window.
.eds
Shows the entire data series of the active chart window.
Table of Parameters for .ISY and .CSY Commands
Description
Parameter
dnum
Symbol name
name
Data provider
df
res
Symbol description
desc
from
to
Do not show the Format Instrument dialogue window if there is an error in the mute
request
Example 1: Enter to command line: .isy name=@ES#, df=IQFeed, res=1 min, desc=E-MINI S&P 500 MARCH 2013,
from=12/31/2012, to=5/10/2013 in order to insert 1 minute graph of S&P mini 500 from IQFeed starting from 31th
of December 2012 up to 10th of May 2013 as additional data series to the active chart window.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .csy dnum=1, name=@ES#, df=IQFeed, res=1 min, desc=E-MINI S&P 500
MARCH 2013, from=12/31/2012, to=5/10/2013 in order to change the data series 1 to 1 minute graph of S&P mini
500 from IQFeed starting from 31th of December 2012 up to 10th of May 2013 as additional data series to the active
chart window.
Note: If dnum parameter is not specified, the selected data series will be affected. If no particular data series is
selected, the data series 1 will be affected.
Table of Parameters for .IIND and .ISIG Commands
Description
Parameter
Name of an indicator/signal
name
base
19
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or maximum bars back bref
Show Format Indicator window
fmt
Example 1: Enter to command line: .iind name=MACD, base=1, bref=100 in order to apply MACD indicator to the
data series 1 with MaxBarsBack parameter = 100 to the active chart window.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .isig name=Bollinger Bands LE in order to apply Bollinger Bands LE signal to the
active chart window.
Note: If no parameters are specified, the Insert Indicator or Insert Signal window is called.
Table of Parameters for .RLD Command
Description
Parameter
dnum
ResSize ResName
Example 1: Enter to command line: .rld 1 min in order to reload data on all charts with 1 minute resolution.
Example 2: Enter to command line: .rld int 2 weeks in order to reload 2 weeks of data on the active chart.
Note: If a parameter is specified incorrectly, the .rld will be used for the active chart.
Table of Resolutions for Command Line
Resolution
name
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Tick
tick
ticks
ts
Contract
volume
volumes
contract contracts
Point
point
points
pt
Point Original
orpts
Change
change
changes
chg
chgs
Second
second
seconds
sec
secs
Minute
minute
minutes
min
mins
Hour
hour
hours
hr
hrs
Day
day
days
ds
Week
week
weeks
wk
wks
Month
month
months
mth
mths
Quarter
quarter
quarters
qrt
qrts
Year
year
years
yr
yrs
pts
20
Customizing Toolbars
With Custom Toolbars, the user can not only choose which toolbar to display, but also which buttons appear on the
toolbar. Adding more toolbars and buttons makes it easier to access certain functions. Consolidating the most
frequently used buttons onto one toolbar saves space and permits a larger display area in the workspace.
Select View from the main menu, then select Toolbars and Customize. The Customize window will appear.
2.
In the Toolbars pane, select the type of toolbar to customize. Check the selected toolbars check box to display
In the Commands pane, select which buttons will appear on the toolbar.
4.
Where:
1 - Status Line Area
c. Instrument name
d. Instrument Dropdown
f. Instrument description
g. Chart resolution
21
h. Resolution Dropdown
- Chart Area
- Subchart Divider
- Subchart Area
Each area intended for manipulation for its own set of objects.
Note: There can be several Subchart Areas in a Chart window.
Note: There can be one or two Price Scale Areas in a Chart window.
Decimal symbol
List separator
Measurement system
To access the Customize Regional Options, please refer to the help files from the Windows operating system.
The number of digits behind a decimal depends on whether the number is associated with a symbol or study. For
symbols, the number of digits after a decimal is defined in the Price Scale. For studies, the number of digits after a
decimal is based on the number of significant digits.
Creating Charts
A Chart is created for a financial instrument, designated by a Symbol, such as "GOOG".
A new chart can be created by entering the symbol parameters into the Command Line toolbar, or by using the
Format Instruments window.
If the symbol name is known, the simplest way to create a new chart is to enter the symbol name and all known
symbol parameters into the command line. Any omitted symbol parameters will automatically be selected, and the
symbol plotted.
22
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
5.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
Select a data feed for the historical data from the Data Source drop-down list box.
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
23
8.
Select a data feed for the real-time data from the Data Source drop-down list box.
9.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header.
If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List
10. Double-click the symbol, or click OK , to create a chart with default settings.
To learn more about changing the symbol settings read the following:
Changing Symbols
Chart Resolution
Quote Field
Sessions
Data Range
Time Zone
Data Numbers
Using SubCharts
Chart Style
Chart Scaling
By default, the Command Line toolbar is displayed docked to the top of the application window. If the toolbar is not
displayed, it may have been hidden. To learn how to redisplay the toolbar, see Floating or Docking Toolbars
To learn more about toolbars, see Understanding Toolbars
Symbol parameters consist of the Symbol Name, Data Source, Category, and Exchange parameters. Depending on
the data source and the symbol category, one or more parameters are required on order to precisely identify the
symbol to be plotted.
24
automatically. However, for some symbol categories and data sources, additional parameters may be required in
order to precisely identify the symbol to be plotted.
If the exact symbol name is not known, but only the symbol description or the symbol root, or if plotting the symbol
through the command line does not work, QuoteManager can be used to search for and identify the correct symbol.
Note: When symbol parameters are entered into the command line the first time that that MultiCharts is used, the
Data Source must be specified.
If DataSource parameter is not specified, SymbolName parameter does not have to be preceded by a colon.
In neither Exchange nor Category parameters are specified, SymbolName does not have to be followed by a
semicolon.
If Category parameter is not specified, Exchange parameter does not have to be followed by a semicolon.
If Exchange parameter is not specified, and Category parameter immediately follows the SymbolName
parameter, two semicolons must separate SymbolName and Category parameters (SymbolName;; Category).
DataSource - an optional parameter; specifies the data source
Abbreviation
ASCII Mapping
ASC
AvaTrade
AVA
Barchart.com
BC
Bloomberg
BL
CQG
CQG
CSI
CSI
Dukascopy
DUK
eSignal
ES
Free Quotes
GlobalServer
GS
IQFeed
IQ
Interactive Brokers
IB
IQBank QuickTrade
IWB
LMAX
LM
MB Trading
MB
25
MCFX
FX
Metastock
MS
MIG Bank
MIG
Open E Cry
OEC
Patsystems
PS
Rithmic 01
RT
TradeStation
TS
Trading Technologies TT
Universal DDE
DDE
WeBank
WB
Zen-Fire
ZF
or select Tools
If DataSource is not specified, the most recently used Data Source will be used.
If DataSource is not specified and cannot be selected automatically, a Format Instruments window will open.
The maximum symbol name length is 31 characters; longer symbol names will be truncated to 31 characters.
Symbol name can contain any number of spaces and characters, separated by spaces.
Spaces at the beginning and at the end of a symbol name are discarded.
Exchange is specified by the exchange abbreviation; the list of available exchanges and corresponding
abbreviations can be found in the Exchanges & ECNs window in QuoteManager. To open the Exchanges & ECNs
window in QuoteManager, click the Exchanges & ECNs
If the specified exchange abbreviation is not in the Exchanges & ECNs list, a Format Instruments window will
open.
If Exchange parameter is not specified, a default exchange will be selected based on the data source and
category ( category selection takes place prior to default exchange selection ). Category - an optional parameter;
specifies the symbol category
Abbreviation
Stock
Stk
Index
Idx
26
Future
Fut
Fx
Bond
Cash
Spread
Spd
If the specified Category is not a valid category abbreviation, a Format Instruments window will open.
If Category is not specified, the symbol name will be analyzed in order to select the symbol category
automatically.
Automatic Symbol Category Selection
Symbol category is automatically selected by evaluating the symbol name according to the following rules, in the
order that they are listed; once a symbol name satisfies any one rule, a category is assigned and MultiCharts
proceeds to exchange selection.
Symbol category is Future if any of the following are true:
Symbol name begins with a c# ( except TradeStation(R) symbols ) Symbol category is Index if any of the
Symbol name contains any two different sets of the following combinations of letters:
EUR, USD, GBP, AUD, CAD, CHF, JPY, HKD, KRW, SEK, MXN, NOK, PLZ, CZK, ILS, HUF, MXP, NZD,
PLN, RUR, BRE, USS, SKK, TWD, SIT, SGD, RUB, SON, MTL, LVL, LTL, SEK, HRK, EEK, DKK, CYP
if the Category cannot be selected automatically, category Stock will be selected; category selection takes place
prior to default exchange selection.
Sample Entries and Corresponding Parameters
Command Line Entry
Data Source*
Symbol
Exchange
Category
ES:O #F
eSignal
O #F
UNDEF
Futures
ES:ES H8
ES H8
UNDEF
Futures
ES:$INDU
$INDU
UNDEF
Indexes
ES:EURGBP A0-FX
EURGBP A0-FX
UNDEF
Forex
IQfeed
@ES#
UNDEF
Futures
IQ:@ES#
27
IQ:NUH8
NUH8
UNDEF
Futures
IQ:ADR.X
ADR.X
UNDEF
Indexes
IB
ESH8
GLOBEX
Futures
IB:MSFT
MSFT
SMART
Stock
IB:EUR.USD
EUR.USD
IDEALPRO
Cash
OEC:6AH8
OEC
6AH8
UNDEF
Futures
TS:ESH08
TS
ESH08
CME
Futures
TS:AUDCAD
AUDCAD
FOREX
Forex
TS:$TSTOP
$TSTOP
NASDAQ
Indexes
TS:@ES
@ES
CME
Futures
IB:ESH8
* The Data Source is specified in the table's Command Line entries for illustration purposes only; once specified a
single time, the Data Source will be selected automatically even if DataSource parameter is not specified.
toolbar.
Additional data series can also be inserted by one of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Right-click on the chart area and then click Insert Instrument; or:
4.
If the Chart Window already contains more then one data series, right-click on the chart area, then click Format
28
Position the mouse pointer over the data series that is to be deleted; once the Pointer
a Hand
Position the mouse pointer over the data series that is to be deleted; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
changes into a
, click on the data series and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
2.
3.
4.
Check Show this dialog box on startup check box to display the Data Server Mode dialog box on startup, or
uncheck the box to simply use the last selected Data mode.
29
Volume Analysis
Volume is the number of shares or contracts that trade over a given period of time. The higher the volume, the more
active the security. To determine the movement of the volume (up or down), volume tools (such as indicators or
specific chart types) illustrate in different ways how many shares have traded per period and show trends in the
same way that prices do.
Here are some tools that MultiCharts offers for Volume Analysis:
Volume Profile
Volume Delta
Cumulative Delta
Volume Profile
Understanding Volume Profile
Volume Profile tracks trading activity volume across different price levels and varying time lengths. It is an advanced
chart attribute providing traders the opportunity to see the most traded volume areas, how much volume was
traded on particular price levels recently or within a specified time period and divides total traded volume into BUY
traded volume and SELL traded volume.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Check the Show Volume Profile check box to turn Volume Profile on/off. The Show Volume Profile check box
is unchecked by default.
4.
30
Tick Count. If this profile is selected, volume provided by the data source is not taken into account. Each tick
volume equals to 1. Each line demonstrates the number of ticks traded on a specific price level colored in blue ( by
default). The following components are available for this volume profile style :
Volume Bar Color. Identical to Total Volume, shows total ASK + BID ticks traded on each price level. Default
color is blue, it can be changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume
Shading, it can be changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram or Invisible.
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%).Example 1:
Assume there are 5 price levels in volume profile. Total volume of level 1 is 400; total volume of level 2 is 600 ;
total volume of level 3 is 1000; total volume of level 4 is 500; total volume of level 5 is 300. The total volume of the
whole volume profile is 2800. Default Value are is 70%; 70% of 2800 = 1960. It always starts with POC, that is the
level 3 with 1000 total volume. 1960 - 1000 (POC) = 960. Check closest levels: 2 and 4; each of these levels total
volume is less than 960. Total volume of level 2 is higher then total volume of level 4. 960 - 600 (level 2) = 360.
Check closest levels: 1 and 4; only level 1 total volume (400) is enough to cover 360.Example 2: Assume there are
5 price levels in volume profile. Total volume of level 1 is 200; total volume of level 2 is 600; total volume of level 3
is 1000; total volume of level 4 is 200; total volume of level 5 is 300. The total volume of the whole volume profile
is 2300. Default Value are is 70%; 70 % of 2300 = 1610. It always starts with POC, that is the level 3 with 1000 total
volume. 1610 - 1000 ( POC) = 610. Check closest levels: 2 and 4; each of these levels total volume is less than 610.
Total volume of level 2 is higher then total volume of level 4. 610 - 600 (level 2) = 10. Check closest levels: 1 and 4;
each of these levels total volume is more than 10. Both levels are identical (200 and 200 total volume), in this case
the rest 10 volume goes to the level then is lower, in this example it is the level 4.
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Ticks, it can be changed to Invisible or to POC.
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
Total Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays ask + bid volume provided by a data source for every tick.
Each line demonstrates total volume traded on a specific price level and colored in blue (by default). The following
components are available for this style of volume profile:
Total Volume. Shows total ASK + BID volume traded on each price level. Default color is blue, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume Shading, it can be
changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram, Invisible.
31
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible or POC.
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
Buy x Sell Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays ask x bid volume provided by a data source for every
tick. Depending on the ask and bid volume amounts each line is colored in green and red (by default)
proportionally.Example: If the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, the displayed value is 3000 x 2000.
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
32
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
Delta. If this profile is selected, it displays total volume value and ask - bid result as a part of the total volume
in each line. If the ASK - BID result value is negative, it is colored in red, if the value is positive it is colored in green
(by default).Example: If the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, their delta is 1000, so the 4 /5 of the line
is colored in blue and 1/5 of the line is green, meanwhile the displayed value is 5000 (Total Volume).
The following components are available for this style of volume profile:
Total Volume. Shows total ASK + BID volume traded on each price level. Default color is blue, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Volume Shading, it can be
changed to Solid Blocks, HollowGram, Invisible.
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
Buy vs Sell Volume. If this profile is selected, it displays total volume value in each line and the line is colored
in green/red (by default) depending on whether the ask volume is greater or smaller than bid volume.Example: If
the ASK volume is 3000 and BID volume is 2000, the ASK volume is greater than BID volume, the line is colored in
green, however the displayed value is 5000 (Total Volume).
The following components are available for this style of volume profile:
Up OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as green bar if the openning price of the
profile is lower than its closing price. Default color is dark green, it can be changed to any other color. Default size
can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
33
Down OC. Shows price movement within volume profile at its end as red bar if the openning price of the
profile is higher than its closing price. Default color is red, it can be changed to any other color. Default size can be
decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to Volume Shading.
POC. Shows the price level with largest amount of traded volume. Default color is pale pink, it can be
changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased up to 100. Default style is Invisible,
it can be changed to Volume Shading, HollowGram or Invisible.
Value Area. It is the area (specified in %) of most traded volume of the profile (100%). See the example
above.
Display Text. Shows numeric values for each price level. Default color is white, it can be changed to any other
color. Default size is 100, it can be decreased. Default style is Total Volume, it can be changed to Invisible, POC,
Buy x Sell Volume or Delta.
Outline. Frames traded volume on specified price levels. Default color is yellow, it can be changed to any
other color. Default size can be decreased or increased. Default style is Invisible, it can be changed to All Blocks or
POC.
Price Range. Shows highest and lowest price levels of traded volume per profile. Default color is yellow, it can
be changed to any other color. Default size is 10, it can be decreased or increased. Default style is Extended, it can
be changed to Volume Shading or Invisible.
5.
34
6.
Adjust Ticks per Row value (set to 1 by default) to change the the amount of minimum price increments (set
in QuoteManager by Price Scale and Min. Movement covered by each line of Volume Profile.
7.
not cover a period more than the specified Data Range in chart settings.
If Start ... End ... option is selected, it shows Volume Profile for a specified period of time according to your
regional settings.Example: Show volume Profile from dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss to dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.
8.
9.
If Last is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of visual chart space.
If Every is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of space allocated for specified number of
bars/sessions.
If Start ... End ... is selected in Time section, the 100% of Width is 100% of space allocated for specified time
period.
11. It is possible to adjust the Value Area of the Volume Profile. Value Area is the area (specified in %) of most
traded volume of the profile (100%).
12. Check Use As Default box to use your custom settings of volume profile as default ones.
13. Check Display Above Price Bars to put volume profile in front and the bars in the background. By default the
volume profile is in the background.
Displaying Multiple Volume Profiles
Volume profile is a tool that can be enabled or disabled for a particular data series. 1 data series can have only 1
Volume Profile displayed, however it is possible to see multiple different Volume Profiles for the same instrument
on 1 chart:
1.
2.
3.
Do not change anything in settings of the new data series, except for the following fields:
4.
All the rest settings should be 100% identical to the original data series.
Volume Profile Switch
Since MultiCharts 8.7 beta 1 Volume Profile can be plotted on the chart with a single click on the Volume Profile
Switch
Go To Specified Bar
Go To Specified Bar feature allows you to jump to needed bars and dates without scrolling.
To jump to a specific bar or time and date:
1.
2.
Select the Bar Number or the Date Time option and specify the bumber of the bar or the time and date you
Click Go.
36
Chart Settings
Chart Scaling
The Price Scale is located on the left and/or the right side of the chart and consists of a vertical line with marks
indicating values and identified by Labels.
The values on the scale are specific to the symbol or indicator plotted on the chart.
The scale represents the value range within which the chart is plotted. To determine the value of a point on a chart
the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the Price Scale.
The Range of the Price Scale and the chart's top and bottom Margins can be set.
The Labels, identifying scale's marks, can be customized.
Five Price Scale range modes (scaling modes) are available:
Screen
Entire Series
User Defined
Movement Size
Price Range
Two Scaling Types are available (except for the Movement Size scaling mode):
Linear
Semi-Log
Each scale range setting and scaling type offers its own advantages.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Note: This feature only works if the indicator's scaling range is set to Same as Symbol.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
2.
Tip: Two different Price Scales can be displayed at the same time by setting the left and right price scales.
Margins
Margins are the extra spaces between the visual representation of a data series and the chart's upper and lower
borders and are set as a percentage of the data series' price range. Margins can not be set for a chart with a User
Defined price scale.
How to set
Margins are set from the Format Instruments window:
38
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In Use Margins section, check the Use Margins check box to add margins; uncheck the box to not add margins.
4.
In the Top Margin text box enter the top margin as a percentage of the series price range.
5.
In the Bottom Margin text box enter the bottom margin as a percentage of the series price range.
Note: To use these margin settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Labels
Scale Labels are the numbers that appear next to the marks on the price scale that indicate what value the marks
represent.
If a chart contains multiple objects, the object, for which the label values are displayed, can be selected. The object
is selected separately for the right and for the left price scales, making it possible to display different label values on
the right than on the left scale of the chart.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated, and either the increment (step size) between the labels or
the total number of labels can be set.
Tip: You can elect to set the division factor automatically or manually.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
5.
6.
In the Displayed as text box enter the characters to be added to the end of the label for the selected division
factor; these characters will also be used when Dividing Label Values Automatically.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, uncheck Divide Scale Labels check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts check Use as Default check box.
Automatic - the increment is optimized dynamically to aid the visual assessment of price levels
Automatic
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, uncheck Set Labels Manually check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Symbol window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
5.
In the Set Step Size text box enter the increment value (step size), in units displayed on the scale.
Note: A label at each step will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
42
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
5.
In the Set Number of Labels text box enter the fixed number of labels desired.
Note: The set number of labels will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
43
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
Scale Range
Five types of Price Scale Range can be used: Screen, Entire Series,
User Defined, Price Range, and Movement Size.
icon on
- Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer changes into a
right-click and then click Format Symbol Name;
-
Hand
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
Select the Use Margins check box to set a margin between the plot and the charts upper and lower borders.
5.
Enter numbers in the Top Margin % box and Bottom Margin % box to define the top margin and bottom
margins.
6.
7.
Select the Center Last Price check box to center the last price of the data series in the middle of the price scale.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
Select the Use Margins check box to set a margin between the plot and the charts upper and lower borders.
5.
Enter numbers in the Top Margin % box and Bottom Margin % box to define the top margin and bottom
margins.
6.
7.
Select the Center Last Price check box to center the last price of the data series in the middle of the price scale.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the number of points that the unit of length in Step 4 will represent.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Above box, enter the number of points above the Last Price Marker. This is the maximum value of the
range.
5.
In the Below box enter the number of points below the Last Price Marker. This is the minimum value of the
range.
Note: To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Type
Two types of chart Scaling can be selected: Linear or Semi-Log.
Linear Scaling
A Linear price scale is the conventional, absolute scale. A $10 change in price will always be represented by the same
displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the base price from which the change took place.
47
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
To center the last quote in the middle of the price scale, check the Center Last Price check box; the last quote can
not be centered for a chart with a User Defined price scale.
To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Semi-Log Scaling
A Semi-Log (percent-of-change) price scale is a percentage-based scale. A 10% change in price will always be
represented by the same displacement along the vertical axis, regardless of the absolute price change. A $5 price
change from a $50 base price (10%) will be represented by the exact same vertical displacement as a $10 price
change from a $100 base price (10%), even though the absolute values of $5 and $10 are not equal.
Important: Margins should not be used with a Semi-Log price scale.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
2.
3.
To center the last quote in the middle of the price scale, check the Center Last Price check box; the last quote can
not be centered for a chart with a User Defined price scale.
To use these scaling settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Candlestick Chart
Candlestick Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of "Candlesticks".
A Candlestick emphasizes the range between the Open and the Close price points (ticks), and the direction of price
movement (trend) between them.
Each candlestick consists of a "Body" and a "Wick". The body is a pillar-like rectangle, connecting the Open and the
Close (the first and the last ticks) prices of the tick group, on which the candlestick is based. The bodys color
indicates the trend the direction of price movement between the Open and the Close ticks. The wick consists of
two vertical lines, one extending from the top and one from the bottom of the body, to the High and Low price
points. Each part of the wick is displayed only if its corresponding price point falls outside of the bodys range.
A Candlestick has three components: Up, Down, and Wick; Up is the body in an uptrend, and Down is the body in a
downtrend.
The color of each of the components, the width of the wick, and the body's border is customized in the Chart Style
section.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
49
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width drop-down list box select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To show candlestick borders, select Show Candlestick Border check box;clear the box to hide the border. The
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
9.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Chart Style
Several types of charts can be created. Chart style can be customized for each type of a chart.
The following types of charts are available:
OHLC Bar Chart
HLC Bar Chart
HL Bar Chart
Candlestick Chart
Dot On Close Chart
Line On Close Chart Invisible
Chart
Each chart type offers an alternative visual representation that has its own advantages.
The type and style of a chart are set in the Style tab of the Format Instruments window.
50
Chart Type is selected in the Chart Type section, and Chart Style settings can be customized in the Chart Style
section.
Changes to Chart Type and Chart Style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Under the Advanced group box, check or uncheck the Last Price Marker checkbox.
Chart Style
51
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
or Decrease Weight
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
HL Bar Chart
HL Bar Chart visually presents the data series as a sequence of bars.
Each HL bar is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the
range of an instruments price movement over a defined interval.
An HL Bar has one component: High/Low.
The color and width of each of the bar's component can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Note: HL Bar Type is available only for Regular, Renko and Cumulative Delta chart types.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
and click the Format button. The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the
following methods:
- Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
;
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
or
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
2.
3.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
To apply the most recently selected component's style of to all components, click the Apply to all components
button.
6.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
or
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
the last tick of the group, on which the bar is based, is indicated on the right side of the line by a mark known as the
bar's Close component.
An OHLC Bar has three components: Open, High/Low, and Close.
The color and width of each of the bar's components can be customized in the Chart Style section.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
OHLC Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
To apply the most recently selected component's style of to all components, click the Apply to all components
button.
6.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
A candlestick with a hollow body is called a bullish candlestick. The close is higher than the open.
Solid A candlestick with a solid body is called a bearish candlestick. The close is lower than the open.
The close of the current candlestick is higher than the close of the previous candlestick.
Grey (Neutral)
The close of the current candlestick is the same as the close of the previous candlestick.
Red (Down)
The close of the current candlestick is lower than the close of the previous candlestick.
57
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Candlestick Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
into a Hand
-
changes
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width drop-down list box select a width to change the thickness of the candlestick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
58
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Invisible Chart
In an Invisible Chart the data series is present, but not visually presented.
An invisible chart can be used when the data series is needed for a calculation, but the visual presentation of the
data series is not required.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
59
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the Dot on Close Chart's Close component.
4.
To use this style setting for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Line on Close Chart Type can also be selected by one of the following methods:
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
60
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
To display the Last Price Marker check the Last Price Marker check box, or uncheck the box to hide the marker;
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, check Use as Default check box.
or
select Format in the main menu and click Increase Weight or Decrease Weight.
61
Symbol Settings
Changing Symbols
Symbols can be changed using either Command Line Toolbar or Format Symbol Window.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
Enter all or part of the symbol name in the name/description combo box; as the name is entered, a dynamically
filtered list of the available matching symbols and their descriptions will be displayed.
62
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List.
7.
Changing Symbols
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
5.
Enter all or part of the security description in the name/description combo box; as the description is entered,
a dynamically filtered list of the available matching symbols and their descriptions will be displayed.
6.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you can't find a symbol, see Adding Symbols to Symbol List.
7.
Chart Resolution
A Tick is the information about each real trade (or each bid, or each ask, of a potential trade) received from a data
vendor. A tick consists of the price, time, and volume.
63
A Bar Chart is the most popular format for visually presenting a Data Series. Each Bar is a vertical line connecting the
High and the Low price points (ticks), and graphically represents the range of an instruments price movement over
a defined Interval. The price of the first tick of the group, on which the bar is based, is indicated on the left side of
the line by a mark known as the bar's Open component. The price of the last tick of the group, on which the bar is
based, is indicated on the right side of the line by a mark known as the bar's Close component.
Defining the Interval on which each of the chart's bars is based determines the Chart Resolution. Chart resolution
is also sometimes referred to as the Chart Compression.
Chart resolution can be based on a Time interval (seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years), or on a
Count interval (tick, volume, change, or range).
The choice of time- versus count-based charts depends on the user's preference and trading style. Daily or weekly
bars can be used to help identify long-term trends, while tick bars are better suited for day trading.
Count-based charts are becoming increasingly popular because they focus in on the price movement and filter out
the periods of low market activity.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of ticks to be used for each bar.
64
4.
Note: The maximum number of ticks that can be used to create a single bar is 1,000,000.
Resolution of tick-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of ticks to be
Bar and select the number of ticks to be used for each bar from the drop-down list; or:
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of time periods to be used for each
bar.
4.
In the Resolution Unit drop-down list box select the time period.
Note: The maximum interval values that can be used for each of the time period units are: 86400 seconds, 1440
minutes, 24 hours, 30 days, 52 weeks, 12 months, 4 quarters, or 10 years. Resolution of time-based charts can also
be set by one of the following methods:
65
Click the Second Bar
or the Minute Bar
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select
the number seconds or minutes, respectively, to be used for each bar; or:
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the price movement, in points, that is to trigger
Note: The maximum number of points that can be used to create a single bar is 10,000.
Resolution of range-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
66
Click the Range Bar
to be used for each bar;
icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of points
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of contracts to be used for each bar.
4.
Note: The maximum number of contracts that can be used to create a single bar depends on the data vendor.
Resolution of volume-based charts can also be set by one of the following methods:
Click the Volume Bar
Icon on the Resolution toolbar; from the drop-down list select the number of
Volume Bar and select the number of contracts to be used for each bar from the drop-down list
Enter the appropriate command into the Command Line toolbar combo box. Click here to find out how to use
2.
3.
In the Chart section, in the Build Volume On drop-down list box, select Trade Volume or Tick Count to base
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Resolution Interval text box, enter the number of price changes to be used for each
bar.
4.
Resolution of change-based charts can also be set by entering the appropriate command into the Command Line
toolbar combo box.
68
Data Numbers
Each data series in a multi-symbol chart has a unique Data Number. Data Numbers are used to differentiate data
series in multi-symbol charts, and for the calculation of indicators that use several data series. The Data Number is
automatically assigned according to the order in which the data series was added to a Chart Window.
The Data Number can also be set manually while a series is being added, except for the very first series to be added
to a Chart Window, which is always Data #1. A Data Number can no longer be changed once the series has been
plotted.
Note: Any data series can be deleted from a multi-symbol Chart Window, except for the data series with the Data
#1. Data series # 1 can only be deleted by closing the Chart Window.
Follow the instructions for inserting an additional data series into a Chart Window; to learn how insert an
Before clicking OK select the Settings tab in the Format Instruments window.
3.
In the Display section, in the Data Number drop-down list box, select a Data Number for the data series being
created.
Data Range
Data Range is the entire period of data that is covered by the chart.
Data Range can be defined by two different methods:
1.
By defining the number of bars, or days, back from a particular date; or:
2.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the text box enter the number of bars or days back to be used.
5.
6.
In the Back From combo box, your computer's system date is set up by default; if required, enter another
Click
to save the data range and disable auto adjustment to the current date.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the From combo box enter the starting date or use the drop-down calendar; your computer's system date
is set up by default.
5.
In the To combo box, your computer's system date is set up by default; if required, enter another date or use
Click
to save the data range and disable auto adjustment to the current date.
Quote Field
There are three types of quotes:
70
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Quote Field drop-down list box, select Ask, Bid, or Trade, to use ask, bid, or trade
data, respectively.
Sessions
Trading sessions are the hours in which a contract is available for trading. The trading session for each contract varies
depending on the contract and the exchange.
A user may also want to only plot certain hours of the trading session instead of the entire session. Additionally, the
user may want to plot the same symbol using different trading sessions.
Setting Sessions
Sessions are set from the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Chart section, in the Sessions drop-down list box, select an applicable trading session.
Tip: To create custom session templates, see Setting Custom Session Templates
Time Zone
You can elect for the Local Time or for the Exchange Time to be displayed on the chart's time scale, by setting the
Time Zone.
Local Time is the system time of your computer, and the Exchange Time is the local time at the location where the
exchange is based.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Display section, in the Time Zone drop-down list box, choose Local or Exchange Time Zone.
Using Subcharts
When additional objects are inserted into a Chat Window, the window is divided horizontally into SubCharts. A
single window can contain up to 20 SubCharts.
SubCharts allow several data series or other objects to be synchronized and viewed alongside each other.
Each SubChart is assigned a sequential number according to its position in a Chart Window, starting from the top. A
chart that is the only chart in the Chart Window is SubChart number 1.
SubCharts can be Resized, Maximized, and Hidden. Each SubChart can contain a number of charts or studies, and
objects can be moved from one SubChart to another.
72
Resizing SubCharts
To Resize SubCharts, position the mouse pointer over the border line between two SubCharts; once the pointer
changes into a Splitter
, hold the left mouse button and drag the border to the desired position.
Maximizing SubCharts
To maximize a SubChart, right-click on the chart area of the SubChart to be maximized and then click Maximize
SubChart.
Restoring SubCharts
To restore a maximized SubChart to its original size, right-click on the chart area and then click Restore SubChart.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the SubChart # you wish to move the series to.
Position the mouse pointer over the over the series or the Status Line of the series to be moved.
2.
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to another
SubChart.
3.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top or Show On Bottom to move the
series to a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively.
A data series can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the series or the Status Line of the series to be moved.
2.
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the upper
new SubChart.
Hiding Subcharts
A SubChart can be hidden by hiding all of the objects it contains.
Objects can be hidden by using the Format Instruments window:
1.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
74
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Hide.
To hide a SubChart you may have to repeat the procedure for any additional objects that the SubChart may contain.
Open the Format Instruments window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format
Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the
Format button. The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
Select the object to be redisplayed and click the Format button to display the Format Instruments window.
3.
4.
In the Display section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top, Show On Bottom, or SubChart
#n, to redisplay the data series in a new SubChart at the top, a new SubChart at the bottom, or in an existing
SubChart, respectively, in the Chart Window.
75
Chart Window
Background
Chart Background consists of Background Color, Grid, and Session Break lines.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Background Color section select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other
Setting Grid
Grid aids in the visual assessment of price levels and time increments. Grid Type and Color can be selected, or the
Grid can be hidden. The available Grid Types are: Point, Solid, Horizontal, Dotted, and Detailed Dotted.
Grid is set from the Format Window window:
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In Show Grid section check the Show Grid check box to display the Grid on the chart; uncheck the box to hide
the Grid.
4.
5.
Tip: To use these background settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
76
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In Show Session Breaks section check Show Session Breaks check box to display the lines on the chart; uncheck
5.
6.
Select line weight in the Weight drop-down list box; line weight can only be selected for the solid line style.
Tip: To use these background settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Chart Appearance
The appearance of the following Chart Window elements can be customized from the Format Appearance Window:
Background
Background Color
Grid
Session Brakes
Chart Window
Setting SubChart Dividers
Title Bar
Setting Scroll Bar
Price Scale
TimeScale
Status Line
Volume Profile
Note: Changes to Chart Appearance settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
77
Chart Window
The appearance of SubChart Dividers and of the Chart Window's Title Bar and Scroll Bar are set from the Format
Window window.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the dividers; uncheck
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the Dividers.
4.
5.
6.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Setting 3D Divider
3D SubChart Divider color and style are determined by the operating system appearance settings.
78
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In Show SubChart Dividers section, check Show SubChart Dividers check box to display the Dividers.
4.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
The Format Window window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
- Double-click on an empty area of the chart, or on the chart's Status Line Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window Select Format in the main menu and click Window.
2.
3.
Tip: To use these settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Data Window
The Data Window displays information about a specific bar on the chart.
When the user points the mouse pointer at a bar on the chart, the Data Window will automatically show data series
information, strategy information, and indicator information.
The data series information will show the date and time stamp, price level of the mouse pointer, symbol name,
open, high, low, close, up volume, down volume, and bar number.
The strategy information will show the direction of the signal, quantity, and the entry/exit price.
The indicator information will show the indicator names and values.
Select View from the main menu, then select Show Data Window, or
2.
Press CTRL+SHIFT+D, or
3.
toolbar icon.
Price Scale
The Price Scale is located on the left or/and on the right side of the chart and consists of a vertical Line with marks,
indicating values, and identified by Labels. The values on the scale are specific to the symbol or indicator plotted
on the chart. The scale represents the value range, within which the chart is plotted. To determine the value of a
point on a chart, the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the Price Scale.
Price Scale Line and Label styles can be set, or Price Scale and Labels can be hidden completely.
80
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Settings section, check Left or/and Right check boxes to display the scale on the left or/and on the right
side of the chart, respectively; uncheck both boxes to hide the Price Scale and Labels.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Price scale position can also be set by right-clicking on the price scale and then checking Left Price Scale or/and Right
Price Scale, to display the scale on the left or/and on the right side of the chart, respectively; uncheck both options
to hide the Price Scale and Labels.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Style section, select scale line color in the Line Color drop-down palette box.
4.
Select scale line style in the Line Style drop-down list box.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Window
2.
3.
In the Settings section, the Label Width is set for the Right or/and the Left scales individually:
to determine label width manually, click the Manual radio button and enter the desired width, in characters,
In the Style section, select label color in the Label Color drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Font section, select label font in the Font drop-down list box.
81
6.
In the Size section, select label font size in the Size drop-down list box.
7.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
Marker Style
In the Format Window window:
Check Precise Marker check box to indicate the current price on the price scale in a precise way.
Check Countdown check box to display the countdown box below the Price Marker showing the time remained until
the end of the current bar.
Status Line
Status Line is located at the top of the chart and displays symbol information and market snapshots for the data
series and studies being plotted. Status Line Fields, Color, Font, and Style can be configured, or the Status Line can
be hidden.
In Tracking Mode, Status Line tracks the position of the mouse pointer. The information is displayed for each series
for only the single bar, corresponding to the pointers current horizontal position along the time scale. If the mouse
pointer is not positioned over the chart, or if the Tracking Mode is not enabled, information displayed is for the
series entire current trading sessions.
In MultiLine Mode, a separate Status Line for each of the plotted series or studies is displayed at the top of the
chart. If the MultiLine Mode is not enabled, all information is displayed in a single Status Line.
Data series and studies can be Linked, Moved, and Deleted by using the Status Line Management Controls.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
To enable the status line, check the Enable Status Line check box; uncheck the box to hide the status line.
To enable the Tracking Mode, check the Enable Tracking Mode check box; uncheck the box to disable the
Tracking Mode.
To enable the MultiLine Mode, check the Enable MultiLine Mode check box; uncheck the box to disable the
MultiLine Mode.
82
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Enable Status Line section, select a field in the Status Line Fields scrolling list box.
To display a field in the status line, check the check box next to the fields name, or select the field and click
To hide a field, uncheck the check box next to the fields name, or select the field and click the Hide button.
To change the order in which fields are displayed in the status line, select a field and use the Move Up or
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Status Line Colors section, select a color for each text or value type in the Color drop-down palette box.
4.
In the Font section, select status line font in the Font drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size section, select status line font size in the Sizedrop-down list box.
6.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
83
button on the series status line; note that the Remove button will not appear if it is
To move a series to an existing SubChart, position the mouse pointer over the Status Line of the series to be
To move a series to a new SubChart, position the mouse pointer over the Status Line of the series to be
please note that the Symbol Link button will not appear if it is hidden in the Status Line settings.
To assign the series to a Link Group, select the Link Group Color Code from the drop-down list.
To link the series to all charts in all open Workspaces, select Linked to All
.
.
Note: The resolution of the linked charts will not be affected. All studies or signals previously applied to the chart
will be recalculated for the new symbol. All manually placed drawing objects will remain in their original location.
Objects based on formula calculations (such as signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the new data series does not
match the calculation criteria.
please note that the Resolution Link button will not appear if it is hidden in the Status Line settings.
To assign the series to a Link Group, select the Link Group Color Code from the drop-down list.
84
Not Linked
Linked to All
Note: The symbols of the linked charts will not be affected. All studies or signals previously applied to the chart will
be recalculated for the new resolution. All manually placed drawing objects will remain in their original location.
Objects based on formula calculations (such as signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the new data series does not
match the calculation criteria.
Instrument Dropdown
This feature allows fast switching between recently used instruments. As this feature is data source based, it
indicates recently used instruments provided by the same data source that provides the data for the current
instrument on the chart. No recent instruments will be shown in the list if a chart from a particular data source is
plotted for the first time or one and the same instrument is always used. To see the list of recently used instruments,
click the Recent Instruments button
Resolution Dropdown
This feature allows fast switching between ten recently used resolutions. As this feature is not data source based, it
will indicate resolutions previously used on any chart from any data source. To see the list of recently used
instruments, click the Recent Resolutions button
Time Scale
The Time Scale is located at the bottom of the chart and consists of a horizontal Line with time stamp marks
identified by Labels.
The increment (step size) between the labels is optimized dynamically to aid in the visual assessment of time stamp
data.
The values on the scale are specific to the resolution of the chart. The scale represents the data range, within which
the chart is plotted. To determine the time value of a point on a chart, the horizontal position of the point is
referenced to a value on the Time Scale. Chart's Bar Spacing, Chart Shift, and Empty Periods settings affect the span
of the scale displayed.
Bar Spacing and Chart Shift can be set, and Empty Periods displayed or hidden. Time scale Line and Label styles can
be selected, or Time Scale and Labels can be hidden completely.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
2.
3.
In the Settings section, in the Bar Spacing text box, enter the bar spacing, in pixels.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
The chart's bar spacing can also be changed by one of the following methods:
Select Format in the main menu and click Increase Bar Spacing or Decrease Bar Spacing.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Settings section, in the Chart Shift text box, enter the Chart Shift, in bars or percentage.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Settings section, check Show Empty Periods check box to display the empty periods on the chart;
86
1.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Settings section, check Show Scale check box to display the scale; uncheck the box to hide the Time
In the Style section, select scale line color in the Line Color drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Style section, select scale line style in the Line Style drop-down list box.
Tip: To use these appearance settings for all new charts, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Window window.To open the Format Window window, click the Format Window
icon
3.
In the Style section, select label text color in the Label Color drop-down palette box.
4.
In the Font section, select label font in the Font drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size section, select label font size in the Size drop-down list box.
6.
In the Font Style section, check Bold, Italic, and/or Underline check boxes to select bold, italic, and/or
87
Drawing Tools
Andrews Pitchfork
This tool was developed by Alan Andrews. Andrews' Pitchfork consists of three parallel lines usually drawn from
three consecutive major peaks or troughs. The three parallel lines formed by Andrews' Pitchfork can help predict
channels of support and resistance in a trending market.
The three trend lines are drawn as follows:
1.
The first centerline at the left-most point that you selected and it passes right between the right-most points.
The second and the third trend lines begin at the right-most points and are drawn parallel to the centerline.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Andrews' Pitchfork.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
2.
.
88
3.
Left-click Andrews' Pitchfork and 3 small squares will appear at the handle and the tines of the pitchfork.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the pitchfork check or uncheck the Handle, Base, Tine 1 or Tine 2 check
boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the handle, base and tines
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the handle, base and tines.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the handle, base and tines.
7.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Andrews'
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Andrews' pitchfork that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Handle Date, Tine 1 Date and Tine 2 Date
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Handle Value, Tine 1 Value and Tine 2
Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Arc
An Arc is a non-analytical drawing tool represented as an arched line and drawn for the purpose of highlighting the
desired segment of a chart. For instance, Arcs can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars. Arcs can be of any
formations that is has any inclination angle.
Inserting Arc
1.
2.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the arc.
5.
90
Moving Arc
To move an Arc without changing its angle:
1.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Reshaping Arc
To reshape an Arc (change its angle or length):
1.
2.
3.
Left-click the Arc and 2 small squares will appear on the Arc.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Formatting Arc
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of an Arc. All the changes are performed in the Format Arc window.
Each instance of an Arc has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Arcs in the same Chart
Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Arc window.
One can change the settings of an arc: the color, style and weight of the arc and the trend line upon which the arc
is based. One can choose any element of the arc to be displayed or hidden. A full arc can be also displayed. It is
possible to change the time and price coordinates of the arc.
Setting Style
1.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2.
Select the Arc that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Arc check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the trend line and the arc
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the trend line and the arc.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the trend line and the arc.
7.
Check the Display Full Arc check box to extend the arcs to the shape of an ellipse or circle (depending on the
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Arcs.
9.
Click OK.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2.
Select the Arc that is to be formatted and press the Format button. 2. Select the Properties tab.
2.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
4.
Click OK.
Cloning Arc
To clone an Arc:
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Arrow Down
Arrow Down
Up and Down Arrows are non-analytical drawing tools drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of
a chart. For instance, Arrows can highlight a specific bar, top or bottom.
92
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Arrow Down.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the arrow to the desired position.
4.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Arrow Down window.
To access the Format Arrow Down window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other arrows.
7.
Click OK.
93
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time and date coordinate in the Date field.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Arrow Up
Arrow Up
Up and Down Arrows are non-analytical drawing tools drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of
a chart. For instance, Arrows can highlight a specific bar, top or bottom.
Inserting Arrow Up
1.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Arrow Up.
2.
3.
Moving Arrow Up
To move an Arrow:
1.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the arrow to the desired position.
4.
Formatting Arrow Up
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Arrow Up. All the changes are performed in the Format Arrow Up
window.
Each instance of the Arrow Up has its own Format window. The numbers (if there are 2 or more Arrows in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Arrow Up window.
One can change the settings of the Arrow: its color, style and weight. It is also possible to change the time and price
coordinates of the Arrow.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Arrow Up window.
To access the Format Arrow Up window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other arrows.
7.
Click OK.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Arrow that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
95
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time and date coordinate in the Date field.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Arrow Up
To clone Arrow Up:
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Drawing Tools
Ellipse
An Ellipse is a non-analytical drawing tool drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of a chart. For
instance, Ellipses can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars.
Inserting Ellipse
1. Select one of three ways to insert an Ellipse:
2.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Ellipse.
5.
Moving Ellipse
To move an Ellipse without changing its size:
1.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
96
Reshaping Ellipse
To reshape Ellipse (change its size or proportions):
1.
2.
3.
Left-click the Ellipse and 4 small squares will appear on the Ellipse.
4.
Drag one of these till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Formatting Ellipse
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Ellipse. All the changes are performed in the Format Ellipse
window.
Each instance of an Ellipse has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Ellipses in the same Chart
Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Ellipse window.
One can change the settings of an ellipse: the color, style and weight of the border line as well as the color and
pattern of the fill. One can also change the time and price coordinates of the ellipse.
Setting Style
1. Access the Format Ellipse window.
To access the Format Ellipse window:
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
3.
In the Line section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the line or click the
In the Line section, using the Style drop-down list, select the desired style for the line.
5.
In the Line section, using the Weight drop-down list, select the desired weight for the line (available only for
In the Fill section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fill or click the
In the Fill section, using the Pattern drop-down list, select the desired pattern for the fill.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Ellipses.
9.
Click OK.
97
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Ellipse that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Ellipse
To clone an Ellipse:
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Equidistant Channel
The Equidistant Channel is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the support and resistance levels for the price
ranges contained in it. The narrower the Equidistant Channel is, the less volatile is the market. The Equidistant
Channel is represented by parallel equidistant lines and may be of several variations:
Parallel Lines - are trend lines used to delineate the Equidistant Channel in which the market trades. The
upper horizontal line is the resistance line. The lower horizontal line is the support line. If either of these lines is
penetrated there may occur a price breakout.
Extended Parallel Lines - are the parallel trend lines extended to the left and to the right. They delineate the
Equidistant Channel in which the market trades and show the past and future direction of the price movement.
Ray Parallel Lines - are the parallel trend lines extended to the right only. They delineate the Equidistant
Channel in which the market trades and show the possible future direction of the price movement.
Horizontal Parallel Lines - are parallel lines used to delineate the Equidistant Channel in which the market
trades, especially when it is a sideway market and there is no significant price movements. The upper horizontal
98
line is the resistance line. The lower horizontal line is the support line. If either of these lines is penetrated there
may occur a price breakout.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Equidistant Channel.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the
Equidistant Channel.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
2.
3.
Left-click the Equidistant Channel and 3 small squares will appear on the equidistant lines.
4.
To change the distance between the equidistant lines, drag the square located on the upper line and release
the button.
5.
To change the slope of the Equidistant Channel, drag one of 2 squares located on the lower line and release
the button.
direction. Moreover, more than 2 lines can be reflected. It is also possible to change the time and price coordinates
of the Equidistant Channel.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
7.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the equidistant lines to the left or/and
right.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
5.
Click OK.
100
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
3.
In the Channel section enter the desired distance between the lines in the Distance field.
4.
In the Channel section select the desired direction from the Direction drop-down list.
5.
In the Channel section enter the desired number of reflections in the Reflection field or select it.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
7.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Equidistant channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Equidistant
Channels.
6.
Click OK.
101
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines:
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Retracement Price Lines.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines to move the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
.
102
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines' from the shortcut menu.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2.
Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
what points the parallel price lines intersect the trend line.
5.
In the Color column using the drop-down lists select any of the preset 40 colors for the lines or click the Others
In the Style column using the drop-down lists select the desired styles for the lines.
7.
In the Weight column using the drop-down lists select the desired weights for the lines.
103
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Retracement Price lines to the left
or/and right.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines' from the shortcut menu. Or
1.
2.
Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
104
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Show Price or/and Show Percent Value check boxes to show price or/and percent labels.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Retracement Price Lines.
12. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Retracement Price Lines' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci retracement price lines instance that is to be cloned.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
105
draw up to 11 arcs based on any selected distance percentages as well as on the Fibonacci percentages. Some of the
arcs might not be visible, because of the scale limitations of the chart window.
The Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs can indicate the support and resistance levels. Usually the price remains above
the higher arc. If the higher arc is penetrated, prices generally fall to the lower arc, which, in many cases, becomes
the support level. If prices break below the higher arc, fall to the lower arc, and then begin to rise, the lower arc
becomes the resistance level.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Speed/Resistance Arcs.
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
2.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
5.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs to move the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
106
One can change the settings of the Speed/Resistance Arcs: the color, style and weight of the trend line and the arcs
( up to 12 arcs are available). It is possible to specify the desired distance percentages on which the arcs are based
or the Fibonacci percentages can be used. The Speed/Resistance Arcs can be extended to the shape of an ellipse or
circle. One can also choose to show or not the labels (price or/and value), select their font, style, size and the
character set. It is possible to apply the strikeout or underline effects to the labels.
Setting Style
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted and press
the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Arcs check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the arcs or click the
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the arcs.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the arcs.
8.
Check the Display Full Arc check box to extend the arcs to the shape of an ellipse or circle (depending on the
Check the Divide Time/Price Separately check box to draw the arcs where time and price are independent (
Setting Labels
1.
2.
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Show Price or/and Show Percent Value check boxes to show price or/and percent labels.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Arcs.
12. Click OK.
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance arcs instance that is to be cloned.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
108
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Speed/Resistance Fan.
Speed/Resistance Fan.
2.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan is to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fan.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
2.
.
109
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan and 2 small squares will appear on the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares located on the trend line till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click. Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Speed/Resistance Fan check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine at
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fan lines or click the
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the fan lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the fan lines.
8.
Check the Divide Time check box to draw fan lines based on the height of the trend line. 9. Check the Divide
Price check box to draw fan lines based on the length of the trend line.
10. Check theHide Time check box to hide Divide Time lines.
11. Check the Hide Price check box to hide Divide Price lines.
12. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fans.
110
Setting Labels
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan insatnce that is to be formatted.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2. Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format
button.
2.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Speed/Resistance Fans.
10. Click OK.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
111
2.
button.
Select the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be formatted and press the Format
2.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci speed/resistance fan instance that is to be cloned.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Time Zones.
Time Zones.
2.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Time Zones are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Time Zones.
5.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Time Zones to move the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
112
Setting Style
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2.
, then double-click.
Or
1.
Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Or
1.
2.
Select the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Time Zones check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the BaseLine and time
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the lines.
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the lines.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating the Fibonacci
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
113
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Time Zones.
11. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci time zones instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Base Line Date field or use the drop-down
calendar.
4.
Click OK.
114
Select one of three ways to insert the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines:
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Fibonacci Tools and click Trend-Based Time Lines.
3.
In the Chart Area click where the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines are to begin.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Fibonacci
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines to move the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Point the cursor at the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines to reshape the drawing tool.
2.
3.
Left-click the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines and 2 small square will appear at both ends of the trend line.
4.
Drag one of these till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
115
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines check or uncheck the corresponding
check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These values determine the
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the lines or click the
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the lines.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Click OK.
116
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from theFont list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. From the Orientation drop-down list select the desired orientation to display labels horizontally or vertically.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Fibonacci
Trend-Based Time Lines.
12. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Fibonacci Trend-Based Time Lines' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Fibonacci trend-based time lines instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
117
2.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Gann Fan
The Gann Fan was developed by the famous trader W. D. Gann who applied a combination of mathematical and
geometric principles to trading. He presupposed that there is a specific relationship between price and time that is
some unit of price equals some unit of time.
A Gann Fan is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate time and price movements from important highs and lows
and identify price breakouts.
To create a Gann Fan the middle line of time relative to price is drawn through two selected points. The first point
is the one from which a series of angled lines extends. And the second point is drawn to the right of the first and
determines the rate of equivalence between time and price. The middle line can be of any angle. The middle line
which has a 45-degree angle is known as the 1x1 price/time line. That is the price unit equals the time unit, so price
and time are in perfect balance.
The angled lines drawn from the first point indicate a price to time relationship that may be relatively fast or
relatively slow, depending on the size of the Gann angle.
These angled lines, relative to an assumed horizontal line and the middle line, subdivide this horizontal line into
eighths (or thirds).
The direction of a Gann Fan should depend on the current trend. To evaluate an upward trend, the Gann Fan should
be drawn upward to the right, starting at a market low. To evaluate a downward trend, the Gann Fan should be
drawn down from the right, starting at a market high.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Gann Tools and click Gann Fan.
Fan.
2.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Gann Fan.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
2.
3.
Left-click the Gann Fan and 2 small squares will appear on the middle line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Gann Fan check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fan lines or click the
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the fan lines.
119
6.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the fan lines.
7. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Fans.
8.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann fan instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Fans.
10. Click OK.
, then double-click. Or
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate of the origin point of the Gann Fan in the Start
Value field.
5.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired points number in the Points per Bar field.
Note. The price points per bar multiplied by the price is used to calculate the Price/Time Gann Lines as it determines
how much the lines increase for each bar.
6.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Gann Square
The Gann Square is created by drawing a Gann Fan from each corner of a square. It is drawn to the right or left from
the selected point on a chart which is generally an important high or low.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and then to Gann Tools and click Gann Square.
3.
square .
4. Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Gann
Square.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
, then right-click.
121
2.
3.
Left-click the Gann Square and 2 small squares will appear in the corners.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
, then right-click.
Setting Style
1.
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Gann Square check or uncheck the corresponding check boxes.
4.
In the Price column select the corresponding cells and enter the desired values. These percentages determine
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select any of the preset 40 colors for the Gann lines or click the
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the Gann lines.
7.
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the Gann lines.
8.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Squares.
9.
Click OK.
122
Setting Labels
1.
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Gann
Squares.
10. Click OK.
, then right-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Gann square instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
will change into Hand
, then right-click.
3. Select Format 'Gann Square' from the shortcut menu.
Or
1. In the Format Objects window select the Drawings tab.
2. Select the Gann square instance that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
123
5.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Horisontal Line
A Horizontal Line is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate price levels as well as the support and resistance
levels. However, you should apply other analysis techniques to confirm price breakouts and make more precise
decisions.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Horizontal Line.
the menu.
2.
line .
3.
4.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
to the labels. If shown the labels can be displayed to the left, to the right, or in the middle of the Horizontal line. It
is also possible to change the price coordinate of the Horizontal line.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Horizontal
lines.
7.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
125
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Horizontal
lines.
11. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Horizontal line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
4.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Recatangle
A Rectangle is a non-analytical drawing tool drawn for the purpose of highlighting the desired segment of a chart.
For instance, Rectangles can highlight a top, bottom, or a group of bars.
Inserting Rectangle
1.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Rectangle from the menu.
2.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Rectangle.
5.
Moving Rectangle
To move a Rectangle without changing its size:
1.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Reshaping Rectangle
To reshape Rectangle (change its size):
1.
2.
3.
Left-click the Rectangle and 4 small squares will appear in the corners.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Formatting Rectangle
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Rectangle. All the changes are performed in the Format Rectangle
window.
Each instance of a Rectangle has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Rectangles in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Rectangle window.
One can change the settings of a rectangle: the color, style and weight of the border line as well as the color and
pattern of the fill. One can also change the time and price coordinates of the rectangle.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Line section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the line or click the
In the Line section, using the Style drop-down list, select the desired style for the line.
5.
In the Line section, using the Weight drop-down list, select the desired weight for the line (available only for
In the Fill section, using the Color drop-down list, select any of the preset 40 colors for the fill or click the
In the Fill section, using the Pattern drop-down list, select the desired pattern for the fill.
8. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other
Rectangles.
9.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Rectangle that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Rectangle
To clone a Rectangle:
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
128
Regression Channel
The Regression Channel is an analytical drawing tool used to precisely define a price trend and its boundaries with
regard to the support and resistance levels. To create the Regression Channel two parallel equidistant lines are
drawn above and below a linear regression regression channel that is based on a user specified price (High, Low,
Open, Close). The bottom line is the support level, and the top line - the resistance level. All these channels are
based on the linear regression regression channel.
Prices may extend outside the channel for a short period of time. But if prices stay outside the Regression Channel
for a long period of time, a reversal trend may occur.
The distance of the channel lines from the median regression line is based on either:
1.
The highest point among the peaks and lowest point among the troughs between the points upon which the
A user specified number of standard deviations above/below the median regression line.
3.
4.
A user specified number of standard errors above/below the median regression line.
Markets tend to have a "balancing point" that is a point towards which prices tend to move. The Regression analysis
allows you to determine this "balancing point". On the other hand, the Standard Error analysis helps determine the
"extreme points".
In MultiCharts there are 4 types of regression channels:
1.
Segment High-Low.
2.
Standard Deviation.
3.
Raff Regression.
4.
Standard Error.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Regression Channel.
3.
4.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer left or right to position the Regression Channel.
5.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
129
4.
2.
3.
Left-click the Regression Channel and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the regression line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape. Keep in mind that the Regression
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
To display or hide any elements of the Regression channel check or uncheck the Regression, Upper Channel or
4.
In the Color column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired colors of the preset 40 colors for the
Regression, Upper Channel or Lower Channel lines or click the Others button to select the custom colors.
5.
In the Style column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired styles for the Regression, Upper Channel or
In the Weight column, using the drop-down lists, select the desired weights for the Regression, Upper Channel
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
8.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Regression channel to the left
or/and right.
3.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
4.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
3.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
4.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
5.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
6.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
8.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
9.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
10. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Regression Line section, using the Based on drop-down list, select the price on which the regression line
is based.
4.
In the Calculation section select the desired calculation type. There are 4 calculation types:
Segment High/Low
Raff Regression
Standard Deviation
Note. Using this type one should specify the number of standard deviations to plot the Upper and Lower Channel
lines.
Standard Error
Note. Using this type one should specify the number of standard errors to plot the Upper and Lower Channel lines.
5.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
132
6.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Regression channel that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendar.
4.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Regression
Channels.
5.
Click OK.
Retracement Calculator
The Retracement Calculator computes the price retracement in percents in order to anticipate future trading
opportunities.
To calculate Percent Retracement three points are selected on a chart: a significant high or low, the opposite to the
first point high or low and an intermediate point between the first two for which the calculations will be performed.
The price range between the first two points is considered to be 100%.
1.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Retracement Calculator.
3.
In the Chart Area click a significant high or low, which will be the Price 1.
4.
Click the opposite to the first point high or low, which will be the Price 2.
5.
Click the intermediate point for which the percent retracement should be calculated. This will be the Price 3.
6.
After clicking the third point the Retracement Calculator window will appear with the Retracement
calculations.
7.
Snap Mode
When Snap Mode is enabled drawings are snapped to the closest open, high, low and close values of the data series
as well as closest plot values.
To enable Snap Mode in the main menu select View and click Snap Mode.
Inserting Text
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Moving Text
To move a Text:
1.
2.
.
134
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Formatting Text
In MultiCharts one can change the settings of the Text. All the changes are performed in the Format Text window.
Each instance of a Text has its own Format window. The number (if there are 2 or more Text instances in the same
Chart Window) are shown in the titlebar of each Format Text window.
One can select the font, its style, size and color of the text that should be entered as well as the character set and
the font back color. It is possible to apply the Strikeout, Underline, Transparent and Framed effects to the text. One
can place the text to the left, right or in the middle of the initial point at which the text is entered that is move the
text along the time axis. One can also move the text along the price axis and place it at the top, bottom or in the
center.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout, Underline, Transparent or/and Framed check boxes to
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Font Back Color drop-down list select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Other button to select
135
12. From the Vertical Alignment drop-down list select the location of the text along the price axis from the initial
point.
13. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when using the text as a
drawing tool in future.
14. Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Text instance that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Date field or use the drop-down calendar.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinate in the Value field.
5.
Click OK.
Cloning Text
To clone a Text:
1.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
Time Line
A Time Line is a non-analytical drawing tool used to show on the time axis the desired moment of time, the beginning
or the end of the needed period of time.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Time Line.
Click the arrow next to the Drawing Tools
menu.
icon on the Main toolbar and select Time Line from the
.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the drawing tool to the desired position.
4.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Time lines.
137
7.
Click OK.
Setting Labels
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
Check or uncheck the Show Labels check box to display or hide the labels.
4.
Enter the desired font in the Font field or select it from the Font list.
5.
Enter the desired font style in the Font Style field or select it from the Font Style list.
6.
Enter the desired font size in the Size field or select it from the Size list.
7.
In the Effects group check or uncheck the Strikeout or/and Underline check boxes to display the labels struck
From the Character Set drop-down list select the desired character set.
9.
From the Align drop-down list select the desired type of the labels' alignment.
10. From the Orientation drop-down list select the desired orientation to display labels horizontally or vertically.
11. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Time lines.
12. Click OK.
Time Line
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Time line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
2. Select the Time line that is to be formatted and press the Format button.
2.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinate in the Date field or use the drop-down calendar.
4.
Click OK.
Trend Line
A Trend Line is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the direction of price movement. The upward trend line
is called bullish, the downward trend line is called bearish. A trend reversal may take place if a market moves away
from its current trend. The Trend Line can be represented as a Ray Line or as an Extended Line.
Ray Line - is a trend line that can be extended to the right only. It is an analytical drawing tool used to indicate the
possible future direction of the price movement.
Extended Line - is a trend line that is extended to the left and to the right. It is an analytical drawing tool used to
indicate the past and future direction of the price movement.
In the menu select Insert, point to Drawing and click Trend Line.
2.
3.
4. Then keeping the left mouse button pressed move the pointer up, down, left, or right to position the Trend
line.
5.
Note: To create a horisontal or vertical Trend Line hold Ctrl while inserting the Trend Line.
2.
3.
Then keeping the left mouse button pressed drag the Trend line to the desired position.
4.
2.
.
139
3.
Left-click the Trend line and 2 small squares will appear at both ends of the Trend line.
4.
Drag one of these squares till the drawing tool becomes of the desired shape.
5.
Setting Style
1.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Color section select any of the preset 40 colors or click the Others button to select the custom color.
4.
5.
6. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Trend
lines.
7.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
140
, then right-click.
3.
In the Extend section check the Left or/and Right check boxes to extend the Trend line to the left or/and right.
4. Check the Use as Default check box to use these settings as the default settings when creating other Trend
lines.
5.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
Freestyle - allows drawing a trend line in any angle and in any position. Using this calculation type one can
Extreme - allows drawing a trend line attached to the extreme values of the beginning and ending bars
Fixed Point - allows drawing a trend line attached to a defined price (Open, High, Low or Close) of the
beginning and ending bars included in the trend line. One should select the desired bar price type from the Fixed
point drop-down list.
Note. Only time coordinates are available for this calculation type.
Regression - allows drawing a trend line as a linear regression line based on the bar price selected for all bars
included in the trend line. One should select the desired bar price type from the Regression drop-down list to
calculate the linear regression line.
Note. Only time coordinates are available for this calculation type.
141
4.
Click OK.
, then double-click.
Or
1. Drag the cursor to the Trend line that is to be formatted.
2. The cursor Pointer
, then right-click.
3.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired time coordinates in the Start Date and End Date fields or use the
drop-down calendars.
4.
In the Coordinates section enter the desired price coordinates in the Start Value and End Value fields.
5.
Click OK.
2.
3.
, then right-click.
142
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
Select Resolution for your chart to be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the bars.
8.
If the current tick price is higher than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY volume.
If the current tick price is lower than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL volume.
If the current tick price is the same as the previous tick price, the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous
price and volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the
volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
If a tick is first one in the series, its volume goes to BUY volume.
143
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick trade data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Up Ticks vs Down Ticks is selected.
If the current tick price is higher or equals current ASK tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY
volume.
If the current tick price is lower or equals current BID tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL
volume.
If the current tick price is between ASK and BID prices, then the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with a price higher or equals
current ASK tick price and its volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with a price that is
between ASK and BID prices, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick ask and bid data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Ask Traded vs Bid Traded is selected.
9.
Check Break on Session if you want to see the session breaks (not available for daily-based resolutions).
Settings Cumulative Delta Chart Style (Open, High/Low, Close, Up, Wick, Down)
1.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
OHLC Bar
Candlestick
Histogram
4.
5.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
144
7.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
9.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Heikin-Ashi
Understanding Heikin-Ashi Chart Type
The Heikin-Ashi chart type is constructed like a regular candlestick chart
(except with the new values above). The time series is defined by the
user depending on the type of chart desired (daily, hourly, etc.). Instead
of using the open-high-low-close (OHLC) bars like standard candlestick
charts, the Heikin-Ashi technique uses a modified formula:
Close = (Open+High+Low+Close)/4 Open = [Open (previous bar) + Close
(previous bar)]/2 High = Max (High,Open,Close) Low = Min
( Low,Open, Close )
145
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
146
Type of the
strategy
Order is placed on Open of Hiekin Ashi bar, when the new tick of this bar is received.
Open of the Hiekin Ashi bar is not equal to the price of the received tick. HA Open = (HA
Open[1] + HA Close[1])/2.
Order is placed on the Close of the current Heikin Ashi bar. Close of the Heikin Ashi bar
is not equal to the price of the tick that closes this bar. HA Close = (Open + High + Low +
Close)/4.
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Heikin-Ashi chart types with regards to Auto
Trading.
To learn how Intra-Bar Order Generation and Bar Magnifier work on Point and Figure Chart Type, see this page
Kagi
Understanding Kagi Chart Type
It uses a series of vertical lines to illustrate general levels of supply and
demand for certain assets. Thick lines are drawn when the price of the
underlying asset breaks above the previous high price and is interpreted as
an increase in demand for the asset. Thin lines are used to represent
increased supply when the price falls below the previous low.
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Real-Time simulation
Type of the
strategy
Order is placed on Open of next column, not on the first tick but only when columns
status turns from in-progress into fixed*.
When a columns status turns from in-progress into fixed*, the order is placed at the
Close price of the previous column.
Price orders
Order is placed either on the last, closing tick of a column or on the Open of the bar
after the column has been closed (if it is guaranteed to be filled) taking into account
Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
Type of the
strategy
When the next columns status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker.
When the next columns status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker.
Price orders
149
Line Break
Understanding Line Break Chart Type
The concept of the Line Break chart is similar to Point and Figure charts. It is
made up of a series of vertical blocks called lines that use close prices to
indicate market direction. The Line Break chart looks like a series of rising
and falling lines of varying heights. Each new line, like the X's and O's of a
point and figure chart, constitutes a new column. Using close prices (or
highs and lows), a new rising line is drawn if the previous high is exceeded.
A new falling line is drawn if the price hits a new low.
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
2.
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Buy next
bar at
market
Order is placed at the price of the first received tick, this tick may not be a part of a
box, in this case the order is displayed not on OHLC of the box but on the price level
of the first received tick.
Buy this
bar at close
Order is placed on the close of current bar, i.e. when the bar is closed then the order
is placed.
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop and Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Line Break chart types with regards to Auto Trading.
151
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
Enter the Box Size, Reversal and Resolution in the corresponding boxes.
8.
9.
10. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
f,
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Price orders
Real-Time simulation
Buy next bar
at market
Order is placed on the Open of the next column, not on the first tick but only when
columns status turns from in-progress into fixed*.
When the status of the column turns from in-progress into fixed*, the order is placed
at the Close price of the previous column.
Price orders
Order is placed either on the last closing tick of the column or on the Open of the next
bar after the column has been closed (if it is guaranteed to be filled) taking into
account Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
Type of the
strategy
When the next columns status turns from in-progress into fixed*, a
market order is sent to the broker
Price orders
Renko
Understanding Renko Chart Type
A renko chart is constructed by placing a brick in the next column once
the price surpasses the top or bottom of the previous brick by a
predefined amount. Up boxes are used when the direction of the trend
is up, while down boxes are used when the trend is down.
methods:
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select whether you wnat the box size based on Fixed Price or Percents from last box open/close.Example: If
the previous box is green and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box close (from the right top corner of the box).
If the previous box is red and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box open (from the right top corner of the box).
154
If the previous box is green and current price is moving downwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based
on previous box open (from the right bottom corner of the box).
If the previous box is red and current price is moving upwards, then the fixed price/percent is calculated based on
previous box close (from the right bottom corner of the box).
9.
Select Resolution for your chart to be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the boxes.
Note: MultiCharts 8.0 implementation: in real-time no matter what resolution is specified, each next box of t
he specified size will be plotted once privious box is finished.
MultiCharts 8.1 and any further version implementation: depending on the selected resolution the current
box may be huge in real-time and not match your box size, but when the selected in resolution bar (1 day for
instance) is closed, you'll see a lot of boxes of the specified box size instead of that huge one.
10. Uncheck Break on Session if you don't want to see the session breaks (not available for daily-based
resolutions).
11. Uncheck Show 'Phantom' Bars to see gaps between the bars if the was no such price.
12. Check Show Wick box to see wicks of each bar, demonstrating how the price was moving before the bar close.
Note: Wicks will not be shown on chart until the style is changed to Candlesticks.
13. Check Show Real Open to see real open price of the box (in this case the box will trigger not from an angle of
the prvious box).
14. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart with the default settings.
Selecting Renko Chart Style (Up Box, Down Box, Current Up Box, Current Down Box)
1.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
6.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
7.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
155
8.
To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
Buy next
bar at
market
Order is placed at the price of the first received tick, this tick may not be a part of the box, in
this case the order is displayed not on OHLC of the box but on the price level of the first
received tick.
Order is placed on the Close price of the current box. When the box is closed the order is placed
at the Close of the box. Last tick of the box may be not included in the box itself, in this case the
order is displayed not on in this case price level of the tick but on in this case Close of the box.
Price orders
Order is placed at the price of the first tick that satisfies Stop or Limit conditions.
Auto Trading
There is no difference between order generation on Regular and Renko chart types with regards to Auto Trading.
To learn how Intra-Bar Order Generation and Bar Magnifier work on Renko Chart Type, see this page
Volume Delta
Understanding Volume Delta Chart Type
Volume Delta chart type provides price and volume activity together on one
data point over a specified time frame. It allows traders to see "within" the
price bar to provide more transparency over a traditional chart. A bar is
divided to equal parts based on minimum price increments for the symbol.
Each box shows ask and bid volume in one of the three ways: ask x bid values,
ask and bid sum or their delta. There are 2 base colors: red and green. A box
is green if delta of ask and bid volume is positive. A box is red if delta of ask
and bid is negative. All boxes within 1 bar are not the same in terms of color.
The darker a red box is, the lower is its delta value. The darker a green box
is, the higher is its delta value. All boxes between these extremes are colored
respectively.
156
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click New Chart Window.
2.
3.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab, or use the Category tabs to show only a
particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header. If you cant find a symbol, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List section.
5.
6.
7.
Select the Resolution your chart will be based on. It allows you to choose which type of data (for more details
see Tick, Minute and Daily Data) and what detailed resolution will be used for building the bars.
8.
If the current tick price is higher than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to BUY volume.
If the current tick price is lower than the previous tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL volume.
If the current tick price is the same as the previous tick price, the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous
price and volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the
volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
If a tick is first one in the series, its volume goes to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick trade data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Up Ticks vs Down Ticks is selected.
volume.
If the current tick price is lower or equals current BID tick price, the volume of the current tick goes to SELL
volume.
If the current tick price is between ASK and BID prices, than the volume is recorded either to BUY or to SELL
volume depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with a price higher or equals
current ASK tick price and its volume is recorded as BUY volume, and then another tick comes with a price that is
between ASK and BID prices, the volume is recorded also to BUY volume.
Note: When you plot Volume Delta chart, take into account that it doesn't matter what resolution is selected,
additionally MultiCharts will request historical tick ask and bid data from your data source for the specified in chart
settings data range, if Ask Traded vs Bid Traded is selected.
9.
Bid x Ask VolumeExample: 0x56, where 0 is SELL volume and 56 is BUY volume.
10. Check Displayed as a percentage to see BUY and SELL volume in %. Available only for Total Volume and Delta
(Ask Bid Volume).
If Total Volume is selected and Displayed as a percentage, the whole bar represents 100% of used volume,
If Delta (Ask Bid Volume) is selected and Displayed as a percentage is checked, then a higher value
between BUY and SELL volume of a particular box is taken, then it is multiplied by 100 and divided by total volume
of this box.Example: BUY volume = 180, SELL volume = 30. The percentage of the box is calculated this way: (180 x
100) / (180 + 30) = 85,71%.
Note that for Delta (Ask Bid Volume) the percentage is shown for each box individually, not for the whole bar.
11. Double-click the symbol, or click OK, to create a chart.
Note: Custom Futures are not supported on Volume Delta chart type.
Settings Volume Delta Chart Style (Up, Wick, Down, Buy Volume, Sell VOlume)
1.
Click the Format Instrument icon on the Chart Analysis toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
changes into a
; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instrument; if the Format Objects window
appears, select the symbol and click the Format button; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
Volume Delta
Profile
4.
5.
In the Color column select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click the Other button to
From the Width list select a width of the body border and the wick.
7.
To apply the most recently selected component's style to all components, click the Apply to All Components
button.
8.
To hide BUY and SELL volume values check the Color Only box (unchecked by default).
9.
To display the Last Price Marker select the Last Price Marker check box, or clear the box to hide the marker;
the color of the marker is the same as the color of the Down component.
10. To use these style settings for all new charts of this type, select Use as Default check box.
158
( Open),
2.
( Open-High),
3.
( High-Low),
4.
( Low-Close ).
calculation on the first bar segment (Open) and generation of a market order on Open = Low of the next bar
segment.
2.
calculation on the second bar segment (Open-High) and generation of a market order on Open = High of the
calculation on the third bar segment (High-Low) and generation of a market order on Open = Low of the next
bar segment.
4.
calculation on the fourth bar segment (Low-Close) and generation of a market order on Open of the next bar.
159
Calculation of the Buy this bar at Close strategy is done the same way as with Intra-Bar Order Generation off, i.e.
the orders will be generated on the Close of the current bar.
Calculation of the strategy that generates price orders will be performed the same way, but the generation of price
orders will be limited by Stop or Limit conditions.
Bar Magnifier is essential for more detailed calculation of the strategy on historical data.
Bar Magnifier with Intra-Bar Order Generation ON allows a strategy to be calculated not only four times per bar (
using OHLC data as with only Intra-Bar Order Generation ON), but as many times as there is detailed data.
BackTest + Bar
Magnifier + IOG
Real-Time + IOG
Regular
As described above
As described above
Volume
As described above
As described above
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Kagi
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Renko
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Line Break
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Bar Magnifier is
not available
Delta
Point &
Figure
Heikin
Ashi
160
Using Charts
Adjusting Chart
It is possible to scroll through charts horizontally, move the data series up or down vertically, adjust horizontal and
vertical scales, and zoom in and out.
Position the mouse pointer over a data series; once the Pointer
mouse button and drag the chart to the right or to the left; or:
Position the mouse pointer over the chart area and press and hold the space bar; once the Pointer
, hold the left mouse button and drag the chart to the right
Use the Arrow Left and Arrow Right keys on the keyboard; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Scroll Left or Scroll Right.
A data series can also be moved vertically by one of the following methods:
161
Position the mouse pointer over the price scale and press and hold the space bar; once the Pointer
, hold the left mouse button and drag the series up or down;
or:
Use the Arrow Up or the Arrow Down key on the keyboard; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Move Up or Move Down.
icon on the
Control toolbar.
The chart's bar spacing can also be changed by one of the following methods:
Position the mouse pointer over the time scale; hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the right
or Decrease Spacing
symbol); or:
Use Ctrl + Plus and Ctrl + Minus hotkey combinations; the numeric pad keys as well as the regular keyboard
Select Format in the main menu and click Increase Bar Spacing or Decrease Bar Spacing; or:
Set Bar Spacing, in pixels, in the X - Time Scale tab of the Format Appearance window.
Position the mouse pointer over the price scale; hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer up or down
or Compress
symbol); or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Compress Price Scale or Expand Price Scale.
Resetting Scales
Chart scales can be reset, canceling any changes made to the time scale (bar spacing) or the price scale (compression
and series vertical position).
Scales can be reset individually or both at once.
162
Tip: Both scales can also be reset by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Reset Scales.
The time scale (bar spacing) can also be reset by one of the following methods:
Right-click on the time scale and then click Reset Scale; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Reset Time Scale.
The compression of a chart's price scale can also be reset by one of the following methods:
Right-click on the price scale and then click Reset Scale; or:
Select Format in the main menu and click Reset Price Scale.
Zooming In
To zoom in on a section of a chart:
1.
icon on the Control toolbar, or select Format in the main menu and click Zoom In; the
Pointer
will change into a Magnifying Glass
.
2. Use the mouse pointer to define a rectangular zoom-in area on the chart: position the pointer in one corner of
the rectangle, hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer diagonally across to the opposite corner; the zoomin area borders will be indicated during the selection.
3.
Release the mouse button; the chart will zoom in on the defined rectangle.
There is no limit to the number of times a zoom-in can be performed within the same chart: to zoom in further,
repeat steps 2 and 3; each zoom-in constitutes a "Zoom Step".
Zooming Out
To zoom out one "Zoom Step" click the Zoom Out
Note: The Zoom Out icon is enabled only if the chart is zoomed in.
Background Dragging
Background Dragging feature is an easy way to scroll the chart horizontally and vertically using the mouse.
1. Enable Background Dragging by one of the following methods:
Note: If 2 or more workspaces are loaded and Background Dragging in enabled, when one of the workspaces is
closed, Background Dragging turns off automatically. The same happens if all charts in a workspace are closed. When
MultiCharts is restarted, the Background Dragging is off by default.
Right-click on the chart area and then click Visual Order; in the Visual Order window that appears, select an
object and use the order buttons to change its visual order; or:
, right-click, then
point to Visual Order and use the shortcut menu order commands to change the visual order of the object. Visual
Order commands/buttons:
Bring to Front the object will be placed in the front of all other objects
Send to Back the object will be placed behind all other objects Bring
Forward the object will be moved one layer to the front
Send Backward the object will be moved one layer back
164
Making Screenshot
An image of the active Chart Window can be copied to the clipboard for use in another application, saved as a file,
or sent via e-mail.
An image of the entire application window can also be saved as a file.
2.
In the Save as Image window that appears, choose the Active Window or the Application Window radio
button.
3.
In the Reduce Image to drop-down list box select the size of the image to be saved, in percent; reducing the
image lowers the resolution and decreases the image file size.
4.
Check the Show Image check box to display the image file once it has been saved.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the Save As dialog box that appears, choose the file name and the image format type, and click the Save
button.
7.
If the Show Image check box has been checked, the saved image will be displayed.
Prining Charts
For a print preview:
Select File in the main menu and click Print Preview; page setup can be accessed, and the chart printed, directly
from the print preview window.
To print the chart in the active Chart Window:
Select File in the main menu and click Print, or use the Ctrl + P hotkey combination.
165
Reloading Charts
Occasionally a bad tick, an error, or a gap in the price data causes a chart to plot improperly.
Reloading will redraw the chart based on a fresh set of data from the data source. In the process of reloading, a new
set of data is downloaded from the data feed.
It is possible to reload the entire length of the data series or to reload only a certain number of days back. Any
existing data, for which no replacement data is available from the data source, is retained.
Reloading Charts
Reloading the Entire Data Series
Select View in the main menu, select Reload, and select Reload All Data, or
Tip: A chart can also be reloaded by typing .rld into the Command Line toolbar.
Reloading Only a Number of Days Back
1.
2.
Global Reload
In addition to reloading the data for a single chart, all of the data, for some or all of the charts, can be reloaded by
entering a Global Reload command into the Command Line toolbar.
Usage
.rld glob[, res = Resolution]
Parameters inside the square brackets are optional
Where:
.rld reload command
glob an optional parameter; specifies a global reload
res an optional parameter, limits the global reload to charts with the specified resolution only; must be preceded
by a comma
Resolution an optional parameter, used in combination with the res parameter; specifies the resolution of the
charts that the global reload will be limited to.
Examples
.rld will reload the chart in the active window
.rld glob will reload all charts
.rld glob, res=1minute will reload all charts with a resolution of 1 minute
166
Note: After reloading charts with 1-Tick resolutions, it is necessary to exit and re-start the application. Make sure to
wait at least 30 seconds before restarting the application in order to make sure that all of its processes have ended.
You can also end the processes manually by using the Task Manager.
Note: In some instances it may be necessary to completely restart the computer in order to complete the process
of reloading a chart with a 1-Tick resolution.
Using Pointers
A pointer is a movable marker that indicates a position on the screen and follows the movement of the mouse.
Commands and options can be selected by positioning the pointer over the desired choice and clicking a mouse
button.
Two kinds of markers can be chosen: Conventional (Arrow) Pointer and Cross Pointer.
The pointers can be used in three modes: Hint, Cross, and Tracking.
Pointer
To choose the conventional mouse pointer, click the Pointer
The conventional mouse pointer can also be chosen by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Pointer.
Cross Pointer
Cross Pointer looks like the crosshairs of a target sight and is preferred by some users.
To choose the Cross Pointer, click the Cross Pointer
The Cross Pointer can also be chosen by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Cross Pointer.
The Chart Hint window can also be toggled on and off by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Show Chart
Hint.
To toggle Hint windows between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Transparent Hint.
Drawing Hint
A Drawing Hint window appears next to the mouse pointer during the drawing operations, and displays the drawing
tool data specific to the pointer's position on a chart.
167
To toggle the Drawing Hint window on and off select View in the main menu and click Show Drawing Hint.
To toggle Hint windows between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Transparent Hint.
Cross Mode
The Cross mode aids in determining the pointer's position. The perpendicular lines of the "cross" reference the
pointer's exact location in respect to the axes, with the corresponding values displayed in the Labels on each axis.
To toggle the Cross mode on and off click the Show Cross
The Cross mode can also be toggled on and off by selecting View in the main menu and clicking Show Cross.
To toggle the Cross mode Labels between transparent and opaque modes select View in the main menu and click
Solid Labels.
Tracking Time
In order to use a Tracking mode the Cross mode must first be enabled.
To toggle the Tracking Time mode on and off select View in the main menu, then point to Tracking Settings and click
Tracking Time.
Note: Enabling the Tracking Time mode while the Tracking Time and Price mode is on will switch the mode from
Tracking Time and Price to Tracking Time.
168
Studies
Expert Commentary
Expert Commentary window is a tool allowing to display a dynamically generated commentary from PowerLanguage
script by clicking on any bar.
Open the Expert Commentary window by one of the following methods:
In the main menu select View tab and click Expert Commentary
Click on any bar of the chart with a study using Expert Commentary keywords applied to display the commentary in
the Expert Commentary window.
Indicator Scaling
The Scale is located on the left or/and on the right side of the chart, and consists of a vertical line with marks,
indicating values, and identified by Labels. The values on the scale are specific to the indicator plotted on the chart.
The scale represents the value range, within which the indicator is plotted. To determine the value of a point on a
chart, the vertical position of the point is referenced to a value on the scale.
The Range of the scale and the top and bottom Margins can be set. The Labels, identifying scale's marks, can be
customized. A Linear or a Semi-Log (percent-of-change) type of scaling can be chosen.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
169
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the Entire Series radio button.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the User Defined radio button.
4.
In the Maximum text box enter the maximum value for the range.
5.
In the Minimum text box enter the minimum value for the range.
Scale increments will be determined automatically. The maximum and minimum values may be rounded off.
Note: User Defined scale range can not be used as a default.
Same as Symbol
The range of the Same as Symbol scale is equal to the range of the base symbol's data series price scale:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Scale Range section, click the Same as Symbol radio button.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Margins
Margins are the extra spaces between the visual representation of an indicator and the chart's upper and lower
borders, and are set as a percentage of the range of the plot's scale. Margins can not be set for a chart with a User
Defined scale.
Margins are set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In Use Margins section, check the Use Margins check box to add margins; uncheck the box to not add margins.
171
4.
In the Top Margin text box enter the top margin as a percentage of the series price range.
5.
In the Bottom Margin text box enter the bottom margin as a percentage of the series price range.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Scaling Type section, click the Linear or the Semi-Log radio button, to select Linear or Semi-Log scale
type, respectively.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Scale Labels
Scale Labels are the numbers that appear next to the marks on the scale that indicate what value the marks
represent.
If a chart contains multiple objects, the object, for which the label values are displayed, can be selected. The object
is selected separately for the right and for the left scales, making it possible to display different label values on the
right than on the left scale of the chart.
The numbers displayed on the labels can be abbreviated, and either the increment (step size) between the labels or
the total number of labels can be set.
172
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, check Divide Scale Labels check box.
4.
5.
6.
In the Displayed as text box enter the characters to be added to the end of the label for the selected division
factor; these characters will also be used when Dividing Label Values Automatically.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Divide Scale Labels section, uncheck Divide Scale Labels check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
You can choose from three different settings that determine the increment (step size) between labels:
Automatic - the increment is optimized dynamically to aid the visual assessment of price levels
Fixed step size - displays axis labels with fixed step between labels;
Automatic
Increment between the labels is set from the Format Indicator window:
174
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, uncheck Set Labels Manually check box.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
5.
In the Set Step Size text box enter the increment value (step size), in units displayed on the scale.
Note: A label at each step will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Set Labels Manually section, check Set Labels Manually check box.
4.
5.
In the Set Number of Labels text box enter the fixed number of labels desired.
Note: The set number of labels will only be displayed if there is enough room on the scale.
Tip: To use these scaling settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Make sure the price scale of the data series in which the study is based is in fractional format.
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
4.
5.
Click OK.
Indicator Settings
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast trends
and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more Plots
lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the above.
Indicators are computed using the price, volume, and (occasionally) open interest data.
Each indicator, applied to a chart, is set individually and has its own Format Indicator window. Indicator Title is
displayed in the title bar of the Format Indicator window. Multiple instances of the same indicator can be applied to
the same chart; each instance will have its own Format Indicator window, allowing different settings to be used for
each of the instances.
Basic adjustments to the indicator's logic can be made by changing the Input Values. Indicator Style, Maximum Bars
Back value, and Base Data Series can be set, and the recalculation frequency selected.
176
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Inputs section, in the Value column, click on the value of the input that you want to change and enter
Setting Style
The Type, Color, Style, and Weight of the indicator's plot can be customized; if an indicator consists of multiple
plots, each plot can be set individually.
Changes to indicator style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Indicator style can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Style section, in the Type column, select the plot type from the drop-down list box.
4.
In the Color column select the plot color from the drop-down palette box.
5.
In the Style column select the plot style from the drop-down list box.
177
6.
In the Weight column select the plot weight from the drop-down list box; the weight can only be selected for
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back section click the Auto-Detect radio button.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back section click the User Specified radio button.
178
4.
In the User Specified text box enter a Maximum Bars Back value.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Base Study On section, select the data series that the indicator is to be based on from the drop-down
list box.
Selecting SubChart
An indicator can be placed into a new or an existing SubChart in a chart window. To learn more, see SubCharts. The
SubChart to place the indicator into can be selected from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
3.
In the SubChart section, in the scrolling list box, select Show On Top or Show On Bottom to place the indicator
into a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively, or select a SubChart# to place
the indicator into an existing SubChart.
179
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
Check Update on Every Tick check box to recalculate the indicator on every tick; uncheck the box to recalculate
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
Tip: To use these general settings as the default for the selected indicator, check Use as Default check box.
Tip: The Last Price Marker can also be used to control how a study is displayed in the Scanner.
180
For example, the RSI study contains three plots, each with its own marker checkbox.
To display the data for only one of the three plots in the Scanner:
1.
2.
3.
Click OK.
The next time this study is added to the Scanner, only the plot that was checked will be displayed in the Scanner.
Signal Settings
Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points according to
a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart by ticks and
arrows.
Signals can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies. Strategies can easily be constructed by simply
applying a set of signals to a chart window, without the need to combine signal code manually.
Market entry or exit points, specified by the signals, can be used to send orders electronically directly to a broker,
fully automating the trading process. To learn more, see Automated Trade Execution.
Each signal applied to a chart is set individually, and has its own Format Signal window. Signal Title is displayed in
the title bar of the Format Signal window. Multiple instances of the same signal can be applied to the same chart;
each instance will have its own Format Signal window, allowing different settings to be used for each of the
instances. Signal settings are specific to the particular signal, while Strategy Properties settings affect all the signals
applied to a chart. To learn more, see Strategy Properties.
In a multi-symbol chart, signals can only be applied to the series with the Data #1. Signals' execution priority is
assigned according to the order in which they were applied, with signals that were added first having higher priority.
Market entry or exit (buy or sell) points, specified by a signal, are visually indicated on the chart by Arrows or
and Ticks | or }. Arrows identify the time, and ticks identify the price value of each trade point. Labels, located above
the sell arrows and below the buy arrows, display the signals name and the number of contracts traded at each
trade point.
Basic adjustments to the signals logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values. Signal's Arrow, Tick, and
Label Style can be set.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
3.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input that you want to change and enter the desired value.
Tip: To use these inputs settings as the default for the selected signal, check Use as Default check box.
Setting Style
The market entry or/and exit (buy or/and sell) points are visually indicated on the chart by Arrows or and Ticks
| or }. Arrows identify the time, and ticks identify the price values of each trade point. Two Labels, located above
the sell arrows and below the buy arrows, display the signals name and the number of contracts for each trade
point.
Color, Style, and Size of arrows and ticks can be selected. Color of labels can be selected, or labels can be hidden.
The style of each of the elements for each type of an entry or an exit point can be set individually.
Changes to signal style settings will be applied to the Chart Window in real time.
Signal's style can be set from the Format Signal window:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
Select the Entries or the Exits tab, for entry or exit points, respectively.
3. In each section, in the Color column, select a color for each of the components from the drop-down palette
box.
4.
In the Style column select the component style from the drop-down list box.
5.
In the Size column select the component size from the drop-down list box; only the size of arrows and ticks can
be set.
182
Tip: To use these style settings as the default for the selected signal, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
3.
Check Enable Intra-Bar Order Generation check box to allow the signal to generate orders within a bar;
uncheck the box to allow the signal to generate orders only at the close of each bar.
4.
To limit each order command in this signal to one entry and one exit per bar, click Limit each order command
in this signal to one entry and one exit per bar radio button.
To limit the signal to only one entry in total and only one exit in total per bar, click Limit this signal to one entry
To allow the signal multiple entries and exits per bar, click Allow unlimited entries and exits per bar radio
button.
Note: Allowing multiple same-direction entry orders in the Position Limits section of Strategy Properties window
will not override the above settings.
every tick and ticks with the same price become vital. The majority of the indicators use only price data therefore
Skip Identical Ticks option is enabled by default.
Note: Skip Identical Ticks option is available for indicators only. "If BarStatus = 0 then..." condition may not be
detected when Skip Identical Ticks option is enabled.
Insert an Indicator.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over an indicator; once the Pointer changes into a Hand
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
4.
5.
Realtime-History Matching
Understanding Realtime-history matching option
Realtime-history matching option allows MultiCharts to synchronize the calculation of studies based on several data
series. When using several data series calculation on historical data may differ from real-time calculation Realtimehistory matching option makes historical calculation results closer to real-time. When Realtime-history matching
option is enabled the signal/indicator is calculated on the latest bar of the main data series and on the currently
completed bar of the auxiliary data series. If the auxiliary data series stops updating, the final calculation will be
made on the main data series bar that was received immediately after the latest bar of the auxiliary data series. In
this case no further calculation will be performed.
Note: If more than one auxiliary data series is used, the latest bar for the calculation will be the one that was
completed earlier.
When Realtime-history matching option is disabled the signal/indicator is calculated on the basis of the main data
series latest bar and current (completed or not) bar of the auxiliary data series. If the auxiliary data series stops
updating, the calculation will continue on the basis of the latest bar of the main data series and the open bar of the
auxiliary data series.
184
Insert an Indicator.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
4.
5.
Insert a signal.
Open the Format Signals window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
3.
4.
5.
185
Study Templates
Studies can be assembled into sets to create study templates. Once a template is created, an entire set of studies
can be applied to any chart, at any time, with just one click. It is possible to switch between different templates and
to apply several templates at once. Study templates can include indicators as well as signals.
Templates can be Created, Applied, Renamed, and Deleted, set to be Auto-Applied to all new charts, as well as
Exported to or Imported from a file.
Creating Templates
A template is created by saving a set of studies applied to a chart; to learn more see Applying Studies.
A template is saved using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
In the Save Template dialog box that appears, enter a name for the template and click the OK button.
Applying Templates
A template is applied from the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
Renaming Templates
A template is renamed in the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
4.
In the Rename Template dialog box that appears, enter a new name for the template and click the OK button.
Study Templates
Deleting Templates
A template is deleted in the Format Study Templates window:
186
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
4.
In the Remove Study Template confirmation dialog box that appears, click Yes to delete the template.
Auto-Apply Templates
One or more templates can be set to be automatically applied to all new charts.
Auto-Apply is set from the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
Check the check box next to the name of each template to be automatically applied.
3.
Click the Close button; checked templates will be automatically applied to all new charts.
Exporting Templates
A template can be exported to a file with a .tml extension by using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
4.
In the Save As dialog box that appears, choose the name for the template file and click the Save button.
Importing Templates
A template can be imported from a file by using the Format Study Templates window:
1.
Open the Format Study Templates window.To open the Format Study Templates window, right-click on an
empty area of the chart and then click Format Study Templates.
The Format Study Templates window can also be opened by selecting Format in the main menu and clicking Study
Templates.
2.
3.
In the Open dialog box that appears, navigate to and select the template file, and click the Open button.
187
Using Alerts
Alert is a visual or/and audio notification triggered when the market conditions meet the criteria specified in the
indicator. Audio and visual alerts can be enabled simultaneously.
Alerts can only be used with the indicators containing Alert Triggering Conditions code. Most, but not all, indicators
contain alerts. To learn how to add alerts to indicators' code refer to the PowerLanguage manual. A check for the
alert triggering conditions is performed whenever one of the following events occurs:
Workspace is opened
Enabling Alerts
Alerts can be enabled from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
Check the Enable Alerts check box to enable alerts; uncheck the box to disable the alerts.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
2.
3.
In the Alert Conditions Check section click the On Bar Close, Every Tick or the Once Per Bar radio button, to
select the alert triggering conditions to be checked at the close of each bar only, every time a new tick is received or
every time a new tick is received once per bar only, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Audio Alerts
A PC speaker beep or a sound file played by the PCs sound card can be set as the audio alert type.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
Click the Beep radio button to set the PC speaker beep as the audio alert type.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
Click the Sound radio button to select a .wav sound file as the audio alert type.
5.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... button
on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box, navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
6.
7.
Click the Play Once or the Repeat radio button, for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
Visual Alert
Alerts can be set from the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the Visual Alert section, check the Visual Alert check box to enable visual alerts; uncheck the box to disable
In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list box select the length of time that the alert notification window
is to be displayed for.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all indicators, check Use as Default check box.
E-mail Alert
E-mail alerts can be sent when market conditions meet your defined criteria.
This feature can be used to stay informed about market conditions while away from the computer.
To add alert to study:
1.
Make sure the study's PowerLanguage code contains alert code so that alerts will be triggered.
2.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
Note: The Format Indicator window for the indicator being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box
in the Insert Study window is checked.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the Settings button. The E-mail Alert window will appear.
7.
8.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
9.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
If the sending process has been unsuccessful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
191
Using Studies
Studies are technical analysis tools based on trading concepts and formulas, and assist in evaluating market activity
and making trading decisions.
Over 270 pre-built, customizable studies, covering the most popular trading concepts and indicators, are already
included with the platform, and additional studies can be imported from a variety of sources. Basic adjustments to
studies' logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values.
Studies can be fully customized, or entirely new studies created, using PowerLanguage scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor.
To learn more see Creating Studies.
Studies can be divided into Indicators and Signals:
An Indicator is a visual technical analysis tool, used to analyze market conditions and identify and forecast
trends and market patterns. An indicator is a visualization of a mathematical formula, and consists of one or more
Plots lines, histograms, series of points or crosses, highs and lows, left and right ticks, or a combination of the
above. Indicators are computed using only price, volume, and (occasionally) open interest data.
A Signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to systematically specify market entry or exit points
according to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's algorithm. The trade points are indicated on a chart
by ticks and arrows. Signals can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies.
An indicator is applied to a particular data series, and can be displayed either in the same chart as the series or in
another SubChart. A signal can only be applied to the series with the Data #1 and is displayed in the same chart as
the series. If a parameter, such as symbol or resolution, of the data series on which the study is based, is changed,
the study will be recalculated and redrawn. If the series, on which a study is based, is deleted, the study will be
turned off. Studies can be Inserted (added) into, or Removed from a chart, and turned off and on. A list of all studies,
inserted into a Chart Window, can be viewed according to type. Indicators can be Hidden, Redisplayed, and Moved
between SubCharts. The Visual Order in which the indicators are displayed on the chart can be changed.
Inserting Studies
The number of studies that can be inserted into a chart is limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
Studies can be inserted from the Insert Study window:
1.
Open the Insert Study window.To open the Insert Study window, click the Insert Study
Analysis toolbar.
The Insert Study window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Insert Study; or:
The Insert Study window can also be accessed from the Format Objects window by selecting the Indicators or the
Signals tab and clicking the Add button.
2.
192
3.
Select a study from the list of available studies; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending
order, by clicking on the column header; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift
keys on the keyboard while making the selection.
Note: Only the compiled (these with the Ready Status of Yes) studies can be inserted. To learn more see
Compiling Studies.
4.
To format the selected studies prior to inserting them into a chart, check the Format check box; uncheck the
box to insert studies without formatting. To learn more see Default Studies Properties and Default Studies Inputs.
5.
Removing Studies
A study can be removed using the Format Objects window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
Position the mouse pointer over the study that is to be removed; once the Pointer
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the study that is to be removed; once the Pointer
changes into a
Hand , click on the study and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
2.
changes into
The indicators list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking on the column header.
The columns display the following information:
Name name of the indicator
Input String input parameters of the indicator; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs and Setting Studies Inputs
Status current status of the indicator: on the indicator is turned on, or off the indicator is turned off
SubChart the SubChart, in which the indicator is plotted
Base Data # the data series, to which the indicator is applied
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
2.
changes into
The signals list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking on the column header.
The columns display the following information:
Name name of the signal
Input String input parameters of the signal; to learn more see Default Studies Inputs and Setting Studies Inputs
Status current status of the signal: on the signal is turned on, or off the signal is turned off
194
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the SubChart# you want to move the indicator
to.
An indicator can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the over the indicator or the Status Line of the indicator to be moved;
2.
, hold the left mouse button and drag the indicator to another
SubChart.
3.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the Show On Top or Show On Bottom to move
the indicator to a new SubChart at the top or at the bottom of the Chart Window, respectively.
An indicator can also be moved by the following method:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over the indicator or the Status Line of the indicator to be moved;
2.
, hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the upper
new SubChart.
195
Hiding Indicators
In some instances displaying an indicator may not be necessary. Hidden indicators retain their full functionality and
continue running. Please note that a signal can not be hidden.
An indicator can be hidden using the Format Indicator window:
1.
Open the Format Indicator window.To open the Format Indicator window, position the mouse pointer over
The Format Indicator window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
, right-click and
Open the Format Objects window; in the Indicators tab, select an indicator and click the Format button. See
3.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select the Hide.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
2.
3.
Select the indicator to be redisplayed and click the Format button to display the Format Indicator window.
4.
5.
In the SubChart section, in the SubChart scrolling list box, select Show On Top, Show On Bottom, or SubChart
#n, to redisplay the indicator in a new SubChart at the top, a new SubChart at the bottom, or in an existing SubChart,
respectively.
196
An indicator, based on a data series that has been deleted, will be turned off, and can only be turned back on after
it has been reassigned to another, existing data series. To learn more see Setting Base Data Series.
A study can be turned off or on from the Format Objects window:
1.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
Select the tab corresponding to the type of study you want to turn off or on.
3.
Select the study that you want to turn off or on, and click the Status button.
4.
The study's status, displayed in the Status column of the Format Objects window, will change.
Right-click on the chart area and then click Visual Order; in the Visual Order window that appears, select an
object and use the order buttons to change its visual order; or:
, right-click, then
point to Visual Order and use the shortcut menu order commands to change the visual order of the object. Visual
Order commands/buttons:
Bring to Front the object will be placed in the front of all other objects
Send to Back the object will be placed behind all other objects Bring
Forward the object will be moved one layer to the front
Send Backward the object will be moved one layer back
197
Trading
Broker Profiles
Broker Profiles Overview
Understanding Broker Profiles
Broker Profile is a set of connection parameters that is used to configure the connection to any of supported brokers.
It is important to understand that in MultiCharts data feed and broker connections are separate types of connection.
Unlike a simple broker connection, Broker Profiles is a convenient way to configure the connection to different
brokers and accounts. It is possible to create multiple profiles for the same broker, in case several accounts are going
to be used.
Example: You have two accounts with Interactive Brokers: a simulation account and a live account. You can create
two different Broker Profiles (i.e. IB SIM and IB LIVE) to be able to connect to both accounts simultaneously.
It is important to understand that in MultiCharts data feed and broker connections are separate types of connection.
Connection to data provider needs to be set up in QuoteManager, while the broker connection should be configured
in MultiCharts itself.
All information about broker plug-in configuration is stored in a corresponding Broker Profile.
Example: If the chart has data from Interactive Brokers, IB automated trading plug-in is selected by default for this
chart. Connection settings are the same as in the corresponding Broker Profile (except for Default Account settings
for FXCM Broker Profile).
If the instrument on the chart is provided by a data vendor that is not a broker, then the default plug-in for
automated trading will be the same as the first existing Broker Profile on the Trade Bar.
Example: If the first Broker Profile on the Trade Bar is Dukascopy and a new chart is created using eSignal data feed,
then Dukascopy will be selected by default as the broker plug-in for automated trading.
2.
3.
To add new Broker Profile, click New on the right side of the Broker Profiles window and select a broker from the
list.
To activate or deactivate a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Activate or Deactivate buttons on the right
side of the Broker Profiles window.
To connect or disconnect a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Connect or Disconnect buttons on the right
side of the Broker Profiles window.
To remove one of the existing Broker Profiles, select the profile and click the Remove button on the right side of the
Broker Profiles window.
To edit a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Edit button on the right side of the Broker Profiles window.
Properties <Broker Profile name> window will open.
Broker Profile settings can also be configured by right-clicking the Broker Profile tab on Trade Bar (see Trade Bar) ,
and clicking Edit Broker Profile.
Note: It is possible to review or edit Broker Profile settings while it is profile is connected only using the Manage
Broker Profiles option.
To rename a Broker Profile, select the profile and click the Rename button on the right side of the Broker Profiles
window.
2.
2.
3.
4.
2.
2.
3.
Note: If you click the Broker Connection Button without selecting a profile in drop-down list, it will connect the first
available profile (see Understanding Broker Profiles), or last used on this chart profile.
199
2.
3.
Note: Broker Connection indicator can be colored red, yellow or green depending on the connection status.
Note: If you click the Broker Connection Button without selecting a profile in drop-down list, it will connect the
first available profile(see Understanding Broker Profiles), or last used on this chart profile.
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab and check/uncheck the Sound Alerts
check box.
Troubleshooting
The log of establishing connection to a broker and connection issues can be viewed on the Logs tab of Order and
Position Tracker window. If there are error lines in red that came from your broker, make all necessary settings
corrections according to the indicated reason or contact your broker.
The only available Time-in-Force parameter for orders is GTC, so every order is sent with this Time-in-Force.
Modification of orders in automated trading is not supported. Old order is cancelled, a new modified one is placed.
Modification of orders in manual trading is supported (# of contracts, price). It is not possible to modify order price
to a price that guaranteed immediate order execution.
For FOREX trade size should be equal to the amount of units, not trade lots.
Open position Profit/Loss is provided through AvaTrade API.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is provided through AvaTrade API.
CQG does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up AvaTrade Broker Profile
In the Properties AvaTrade window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by AvaTrade :
Enter Login and Password.
Select type of connection: Demo / Real.
Make sure the currency of the account is specified correctly.
2.
Control Panel
3.
CQG Trader
CQGNet
4.
If you are using MultiCharts 8.5 Release or Release Candidate, install the following version of CQG API:
https://dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4.05. 101_Install. msi
If you are using MultiCharts 8.0 Release or any previous version, install the following version of CQG API: https:/ /
dl.dropbox. com/u/27918922/ Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4. 04.542_Install.msi
At the moment it is not possible to use multiple CQG/AMP accounts in MultiCharts. Only one and the same account
should be used for getting data and trading. If different logins and passwords are entered in CQG data source
configuration and broker profile, connection to data source will work, the broker profile will not.
201
AMP accounts originally created for a different software will not work in MultiCharts. Customers need to contact
AMP directly to setup their accounts for MultiCharts or request a demo account here: [1] Open position Profit/Loss
is provided through CQG API. Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is provided through CQG API.
If MultiCharts sends a stop order with the price equal to current market price or better (guaranteed to be executed)
it will be rejected by the broker. Therefore, MultiCharts converts such stop orders into market orders.
Note: If a stop order is adjusted manually or by your script to the price equal to current market price or better
(guaranteed to be executed), the order wont be converted into market order. It will be rolled back.
Stop-Limit orders: if at the moment an order is sent its stop level is met, then it will be converted into market order.
Stop-Limit orders with stop and limit levels not overlapping each other are rejected by the broker.
When an orders is sent from MultiCharts to CQG broker to be executed on an expired contract, the broker will
automatically redirect the order to the same symbol, but currently active contract.
CQG does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group on its end.
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts and once
one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of the OCO
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up CQG Broker Profile
In the Properties CQG window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by CQG:
1.
Authority section.
Open position Profit/Loss is calculated in MultiCharts. The basis for the calculation is Average Entry Price sent by
Dukascopy.
Unrealized Profit/Loss for the account is not available.
Stop-Limit orders are not supported by Dukascopy.
Dukascopy does not provide account information to MultiCharts and it is not avalable in order and Position Tracker
window on Accounts tab.
Note: Dukascopy does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO group
on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by MultiCharts
and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts. When one of
the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the
second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCOOrders Risk).
Setting up Dukascopy Broker Profile
In the Properties Dukascopy window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Dukascopy
:
1.
2.
Order Connection Settings section: Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID
3.
Price Connection Settings section: Login, Password, Port number, SenderCompID and TargetCompID
4.
2.
3.
IB Trader Workstation.
2.
IB Gateway.
2.
3.
Note: By default both in IB TWS and IB Broker Profile in MultiCharts Port (Socket port) number is 7496. If more than
one IB TWS are going to be used, then separate Broker Profile should be created per each additional IB TWS and set
their Port numbers accordingly, but each IB Broker profile should have unique Port number, that corresponds to one
IB TWS.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
204
2.
Note: By default in IB Gateway Socket port number is 4001. In IB Broker Profile in MultiCharts default Port (Socket
port) number is 7496.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
DAY
Order is canceled if it is not executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default; or:
GTC ( Good-Till-Canceled )
Order remains active until it is cancelled.
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled is to be canceled as soon as it becomes available in the market.
Settling Firm.
Clearing Account.
Default Account.
All or None Execution. An order waits for a specified number of contracts at broker. Either all are filled or none of
them.
Exit Orders
Automatic Allocation
Group: a group of accounts should be created in TWS and the name of the group should be put to this field.
Method: a method of allocation for the group should be specified.
Percentage: percentage of allocation should be specified.
Manual Allocation
Profile: a profile in IB TWS should be created, where all the settings are set up and the profile name should be put
to this field; or:
Account: only 1 account of the group should be specified to send all the orders directly on this account.
All limits (entry and exit) are green (on exchange). All
Stops (entry and exit) are blue (on broker).
Note: On IB Live account you can send Stop orders directly to the exchange (green in TWS).
Enable "Use outside RTH tag" to do that. In order to send multiple orders directly to the exchange "Use Native OCO
Group" should also be disabled.
DAY
Order is canceled if it is not executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default.
GTC (Good-Till-Canceled)
Order stays within the system and in the marketplace till it gets executed or canceled. GTC orders are automatically
cancelled under the following conditions.
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled is to be canceled as soon as it becomes available in the market.
207
Authority section
208
Select one of the two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
209
The Demo Mode box: check it to disable the profile settings and turn on demo mode. In this mode orders are not
sent to the broker.
Enter Login and Password.
License (default value is FBD653F002), Environment, Application ID and Application Version parameters are
configured by default; however the broker may provide different settings. Enter these settings into appropriate
fields.
2.
SSL section.
To use SSL certificate provided by Patsystems, check the Use SLL and enter its name.
4.
DAY
Order is canceled if it does not get executed by the close of the trading day. DAY is set as default; or:
Order is placed and it is active up to a specified date. Once GTD Time-In-Force parameter is selected, the Good Till
Date field appears allowing to specify a number of days. The grayed-out field nearby indicates the date.
210
Note: Patsystems connection can be established only after the API download is complete. Please go to Order and
Position Tracker -> Logs tab and make sure that you have received the following message: "API has completed
downloading data from server"
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
Note: It is not possible to connect Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile and Zen-Fire Local Sim Broker Profile
simultaneously.
Setting up Rithmic Local Sim Broker Profile
In the Manage Broker Profiles window (see Managing Broker Profiles) click New and select Rithmic Local Sim.
Rithmic Local Sim will be added to the list of Broker Profiles.
In the Simulator Options window:
1.
There is price ceiling for stop orders. Any orders beyond this limit are rejected by broker.
On some exchanges (for example: SGX), a stop order and stop prices of a stop-limit order cannot be modified.
Trading Technologies does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO
group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by
MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts.
When one of the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note
that the second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker
(see OCO-Orders Risk).
212
Trading section.
Account number
Clearing Account number
FFT2 tag
Agent Account tag.
Trading Technologies Broker Profile
2.
Select one of two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
3.
If the account requires enabling multiple gateways feature, check the Use Multiple Exchange Gateway (Tag
18203) box.
213
orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note that the second order
may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker (see OCO-Orders Risk).
Setting up Zen-Fire Broker Profile
In the Properties Zen-Fire window (see Managing Broker Profiles) enter the information provided by Zen-Fire
1.
Authority section.
Connectivity section
214
Authority section
Connectivity section
215
Manual Trading
Chart Trading
The chart trading panel allows placing manual orders directly from a chart. The chart is cursor-sensitive, so rightclicking on the chart will create an order at the price level you clicked on. Orders can be also dragged and dropped
directly to a specific price on the chart.
You can send single orders and entire strategies using the methods described above. MultiCharts supports simple
single orders, One-Cancels-Other order groups (OCO), as well as automated entry and exit strategies. The Entry
Automation and Exit Automation strategies can be applied by drag-and-drop or by right-clicking to individual orders,
and entire positions.
Orders can be changed or cancelled by right-clicking them and choosing the appropriate option in the shortcut
menu or from the Chart trading panel itself. Strategy levels (such as profit target and stop loss) can also be easily
changed and moved around. Strategy names are shown on the appropriate levels, showing where the orders came
from.
Active orders are shown in a bright color, while dependent inactive orders (wait for the active order to be filled
before becoming active) are shown in transparent colors. Changing the size, or the price, of the parent order will
automatically recalculate and update the dependent orders.
216
Selecting Broker
To select a broker, click the arrow on the Broker Connection button
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
, percents
and dollars
.
To change indication type, click the PnL and Current position box. Current Ask and Bid prices are indicated below.
On the chart the Profit and Loss can be also indicated in: Dollars ,
Percent
, Ticks
217
Place Order
Place Order menu allows you to place Stop, Limit and Stop-Limit orders as well as to automate certain methods of
entering or exiting positions (see Orders and Strategies). Its perfect for avoiding repetitive tasks, increasing your
productivity and focusing on trading. Automation is especially useful when you need to apply an order pair quickly.
Place Order menu strategies give you competitive advantage over other traders: they allow you to exit the position
faster than others. They also reduce the risk of two orders execution and would be especially useful for traders who
use pyramiding strategies. Each strategy is an OCO group if one order is filled, the other is canceled.
Note: Not all brokers support server-based OCO groups. Consequently, there is no 100% guarantee that only one
order will be executed (See OCO-Orders Risk)
Orders and Entry Strategies are shown as icons on the Chart Trading panel and can be easily applied to the chart.
You can visually change the order levels, which saves a lot of time when managing your orders.
The icons are rearranged automatically: the last used icon is displayed in the top left corner of the menu.
To expand or collapse the Place Order menu, use the Expand/Collapse buttons.
To scroll icons in the Place Order menu, use the Scroll buttons.
To select Exit Strategies Average Open Position Price calculation mode:
1.
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab
2.
Enable the recived from broker button to use the price received from broker or the calculated based on
order(s) execution price button to use the price calculated by MultiCarts based on entry order(s) execution price.
Exit Orders Management
Exit strategies applied to an open position change the number of contracts according to the current position size.
Exit strategies applied to active orders do not change number of contracts regardless of the open position size (do
not "jump" onto the active position after the parent order was filled). They remain active and keep protecting
orders that were generated by the parent order.
Number of contracts for exit strategies applied to the open position changes taken into account strategies applied
to filled orders and their effect on the overall position. In other words, strategies applied to the position protect
the remainder that is not protected by strategies applied to individual orders.
If a position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position, then this strategy is
applied to the entire position and protects it (see Eaxmple 2 below).
Exit strategies applied to positions and strategies applied to orders are visually different on both on the chart and in
the DOM: exits strategies applied to positions have p letter to the left of the number of contracts.
Example 1 - Shows exit strategy attached to an individual order:
Open position is -1 contract.
Sell limit order for 1 contract is sent to broker.
Profit Target exit strategy is attached to the sell limit order.
218
Sell limit order is filled. Profit Target becomes active. Open position is -2 contracts. Profit Target size is 1 (
attached to the order, not the position ).
Sell market order for 2 contracts is sent to broker.
Sell market order is filled. Open position is -4 contracts. Profit Target size is 1.
Example 2 - Shows exit strategy auto-attached to an order opening the position from a flat position:
Open position is flat.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +100 contracts. Master Strategy
size is 100.
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300 (protects entire position
since the position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position).
Example 3 - Shows both exit strategy attached to the entire position and exit strategy attached to an individual order:
Open position is +10 contracts.
Stop-Loss #1 exit strategy is applied to the open position. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Buy stop order for 5 contracts is sent to broker.
Stop-Loss #2 exit strategy is applied to the buy stop order. Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
Buy stop order is filled. Stop-Loss #2 becomes active. Open position is +15 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
Buy market order for 10 contracts is sent to the broker.
Buy market order is filled. Open position is +25 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size becomes 20 (attached to the
position). Stop-Loss #2 size is 5 (attached to the order, not the position).
Example 4 - Shows exit strategy attached to the entire position
Open position is +50 contracts.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +150 contracts. Master
Strategy size is 100 (attached to the order, not the position).
Buy stop order for 200 contracts is sent to broker.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300(attached to the
position).
OCO-Orders
One Cancels Other (OCO) orders are the price orders sent in a group. When any of OCO orders is filled or partially
filled, the system cancels or reduces size of other orders in this OCO-group.
Note: Reduce size functionality is supported by Interactive Brokers only: if one order in OCO group is partially filled,
others are reduced in size proportionally.
All Entry Strategies are placed with OCO-orders. There are two types of OCO-groups in MultiCharts: Native and
Simulated.
219
Native OCO-group is used when the brokers API supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the
broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by the broker. (Native OCO-group is supported by
Interactive Brokers and FXCM).
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders will be sent to the broker, but once one of them is filled, other
orders from this OCO group will be cancelled by MultiCharts. In this case, when one of the OCO orders is filled,
MultiCharts will send a command to cancel or reduce size of the second OCO order to the broker.
Please note that in case of high market volatility there may be not enough time to cancel the order and therefore
both orders may be filled. Both orders also may be filled in the unlikely event of crash or connection loss.
All OCO-orders of the same group will have the same OCO-ID. You may check it in the Orders tab of the Order and
Position Tracker window.
Calculator automatically increases the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can modify the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the right side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
Order Modification
Order modification allows adjusting price level and changing the quantity of the order that has not been filled yet.
Adjusting price levels
To modify order price, drag the order marker on the chart and drop it to the desired price level.
When you drag the order with the mouse, it shows the difference between the actual position of the cursor and Bid
or Ask price while you hold left button.
If you move the order somewhere between Bid and Ask on the price scale, it shows you current spread value
changing dynamically.
To cancel the price level adjustment, press Esc before releasing left mouse button.
To modify the length of the line connecting order marker and price label on the price scale see Chart Trading Settings.
220
Changing Quantity
Change quantity of the order by one of the following methods:
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Change Quantity and select the
quantity; or:
Click on volume value on order marker on the chart and modify the quantity in Trading Calculator (see Trading
Calculator)
Note: Unlike DOM, in Chart Trading the orders with the same price levels can be moved and modified separately (
without joining the orders into one group) by drag-and-drop. If you want to cancel the price level adjustment, press
Esc before releasing left mouse button.
Cancelling orders
Cancel separate threads or the order/strategy completely by one of the following methods:
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu and select Cancel Order.
To cancel multiple orders at a time orders use Cancel Asks, Cancel Bids and Cancel All buttons.
The Cancel Asks button cancels all pending buy orders. The Cancel Bids button cancels all pending sell orders. The
Cancel All button cancels all pending orders.
Close position
Close the position by one of the following methods:
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu and click Close Position; or:
Reverse position
Reverse the position by one of the following methods:
Right-click the order marker on the chart to see the shortcut menu to call context menu and select Reverse
Position; or:
Click the Reverse button at the right side of position marker on the chart.
Reverse closes the current position with market order, cancels all pending orders and sends market order to open
the position in opposite direction for the same number of contracts.
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading; or
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading; or
Click the Format tab in the main menu and then click Chart Trading.
Require Order confirmation when enabled, the confirmation window will be shown every time you place an order
Show Open Positions enables/disables active positions indication on the chart
Show Historical Orders enables/disables historical orders indication on the chart
Show Active orders enables/disables active orders indication on the chart
Show Trade Panel shows/hides Trade Panel
Show Best Bid & Best Ask enables/disables indication of Best Bid & Best Ask in Trade Panel
Stop Limit Offset allows setting default Stop Limit offset with spin-box
PnL Display Unit allows selection of PnL indication type (Currency, Point, Percent)
Use as Default saves the settings as Default. All subsequently created charts will use the same settings
Appearance
To configure visual parameters of Chart Trading orders:
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading; or
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, then click Format Chart Trading; or
Click the Format tab in the main menu, then click Chart Trading.
Historical Orders
Select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click Other to use custom colors for the key components
of historical orders markers.
Change the style and the size of the components using 28 custom vertical and horizontal arrows and 7 custom sizes.
Connecting Line Length - modifies the length of the line connecting order marker and price label on the price scale.
To configure order markers size you should change Status Line font size.
To change Status Line font size right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu, click Format Window, select the
Status Line tab and modify Font Size.
Active Orders and Positions
Select one of the standard 40 colors from the palette box, or click Other to create custom colors for the Active Orders
and Positions.
Change style and weight of connecting lines using 5 custom line types and 7 custom weights.
Default Active Order Colors
222
Appearance
Stop Order is displayed as sienna marker on the chart connected to the
order price label on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Stop Order marker color and connecting line length can be
modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
; or:
Right-click at the desired price level to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click Buy / Sell Stop;
or:
Right-click the Stop Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply Strategy
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. If
you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking on the
current price level makes both Buy Stop and Sell Stop options available.
223
Limit Order
A Limit Order will buy or sell a set number of shares at a specified price
or better.
Appearance
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click Buy
/ Sell Limit; or:
Right-click the Limit Order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
in the Place Order menu (Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created).
224
Note: When Require Order confirmation option is disabled no confirmation window will appear.
Appearance
Default Stop Limit Order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Buy / Sell Stop Limit; or:
Right-click the Stop Limit order icon
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will be
created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu.
If you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking
on the current price level makes both Buy Stop Limit and Sell Stop Limit options available.
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
225
2.
3.
4.
Breakout Strategy
A breakout is usually defined as a sudden and significant price
movement through the support and resistance levels, usually followed
by large trading volume and increased volatility. A breakout trader will
buy if the price goes up through the resistance level and sell if the price
goes down through the support level, assuming that the motion will continue.
The Breakout Strategy will place two stop orders at the prices (distance) specified, in order to catch the breakout
when it happens. A buy stop order will be placed above the current price and a sell stop order below the current
price.
Appearance
Breakout Strategy orders are displayed as medium purple markers on the chart connected to the order price labels
on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Breakout Strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
Double-click
the
Breakout
Strategy icon
Right-click the Breakout Strategy icon http:/ / www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ strategies/ 12. png in the Place
Click Edit.
3.
Breakout/Breakdown levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either Breakout/Breakdown level
or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated in ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
226
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
icon.
Fade Strategy
Fading is usually defined as trading against the trend, a mirror-image
of the breakout. If the market goes up, fading traders will sell, hoping
that the price will go down. Similarly, fading traders will buy if the price
goes down.
The Fade Strategy will place two limit orders at the prices (distance) specified, so fading can start when the price
moves. A buy limit order will be placed below the current price and a sell limit order above the current price.
Appearance
Fade Strategy orders are displayed as olive drab markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on the
price scale with a dotted line.
Default Fade Strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
icon in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
Double-click
the
Fade
1.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify upper and lower limits values in Upper Limit At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Upper and lower limits levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK
Appearance
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders are displayed as sienna markers on the chart connected to the order price labels
on the price scale with a dotted line.
Default Breakout up/fade strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart
Trading menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Double-click
the
Breakout
Up/Fade
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakout and Lower limit values in Breakout At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Breakout and lower limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Appearance
Breakout down/fade strategy orders are displayed as dark cyan markers on the chart connected to the order price
labels on the price scale with a dotted line.
229
Default Breakout down /fade strategy order markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format
Chart Trading menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
230
231
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click DOM Window, or:
Selecting Broker
To select a broker, click on the arrow next to the Broker Connection button
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview.
is establishing the connection with the broker, the Broker Connection button is yellow. Once the connection is
established, it becomes green.
You can also right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to
see the shortcut menu and click Connect / Disconnect Broker Profile.
For more info see Broker Profiles Overview.
232
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
Type in the symbol name into the Instrument Selector field and press Enter; or:
Click on the Lookup button to select the necessary symbol from the database.
Note: To be able to trade the instrument in the DOM, you should add it to the Quote Manager (see Operating Symbol
List).
, Ticks
and Percent
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or Ask Size column (sell order).
Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined by the value set in
Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force); or:
Note: If you click below Best Ask price in Sell column or above Best Bid price in Buy column, a Stop order will be sent
by default. To send Sell limit orders below Best Ask price or Buy limit orders above Best Bid price hold Shift button
and click on the price at which you want to send an order.
233
Drag-and-drop Limit order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or
Hold the Ctrl (or Shift) key on the keyboard and click Buy Bid/ Buy Ask or Sell Bid/Sell Ask buttons.
Note: When the Ctrl key is held, the Buy Mkt and the Sell Mkt buttons will become Buy Bid and Sell Bid buttons
respectively. When the Shift key is held, the Buy Mkt and the Sell Mkt buttons will become the Buy Ask and the Sell
Ask buttons respectively.
Placing Stop Orders
Place a Stop order by one of the following methods:
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order) or Ask Size column (sell order).
Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In Force
field(see Setting Time in Force) ; or:
Note: If you click above Best Ask price in Sell column or below Best Bid price in Buy column, a Limit order will be sent
by default. To send Sell Stop orders above Best Ask price or Buy limit orders below Best Bid price hold Ctrl button
and click on the price at which you want to send an order.
Drag-and-drop of Stop order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column (buy order)
or Ask Size column (sell order). Order Volume is defined by Qty field (see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (
TIF) is defined by the value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force ).
Note: If you drag and drop Stop order icon above Best Ask price, a Buy Stop order will be placed regardless of the
column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell). If you drag and drop limit order icon below Best Bid price, a Sell
Stop order will be placed regardless of the column where you drag the order to (Buy or Sell).
Placing Stop-Limit Orders
Place a Stop-Limit order by one of the following methods:
Click on price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column or Ask Size column while holding Ctrl+Shift
buttons. Order Volume is defined by Qty field(see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined in Time In
Force field (see Setting Time in Force).
Drag-and-drop of Stop-Limit order icon to the price scale near corresponding price in Bid Size column or Ask
Size column. Order Volume is defined by Qty field(see Setting Order Quantity), Time In Force (TIF) is defined by the
value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting Time in Force).
Note: When Require Order Confirmation check box is checked, Stop Limit price level can be customized in
confirmation window. When Require Order Confirmation check box is unchecked, Stop Limit price level will
correspond to the level where it is placed (see Require Order Confirmation).
Place Order
Place Order menu allows you to place Stop, Limit and Stop-Limit orders as well as to automate certain methods of
entering or exiting positions. Its perfect for avoiding repetitive tasks, increasing your productivity and focusing on
trading. Automation is especially useful when you need to apply an order pair quickly (see Orders and Strategies).
234
Place Order menu strategies give you competitive advantage over other traders: they allow you to exit the position
faster than others. They also reduce the risk of two orders execution and would be especially useful for traders who
use pyramiding strategies. Each strategy is an OCO group if one order is filled, the other is canceled.
Note: Not all brokers support server-based OCO groups. Consequently, there is no 100% guarantee that only one
order will be executed (See OCO-Orders Risk)
Orders and Entry Strategies icons are rearranged automatically: the last used icon is displayed in the top left corner
of the menu.
To expand or collapse the Place Order menu, use the Expand/Collapse buttons.
To scroll icons in the Place Order menu, use the Scroll buttons.
To select Exit Strategies Average Open Position Price calculation mode:
1.
Select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab
2.
Enable the recived from broker button to use the price received from broker or the calculated based on
order(s) execution price button to use the price calculated by MultiCarts based on entry order(s) execution price.
Exit Orders Management
Exit strategies applied to an open position change the number of contracts according to the current position size.
Exit strategies applied to active orders do not change number of contracts regardless of the open position size (do
not "jump" onto the active position after the parent order was filled). They remain active and keep protecting orders
that were generated by the parent order.
Number of contracts for exit strategies applied to the open position changes taken into account strategies applied
to filled orders and their effect on the overall position. In other words, strategies applied to the position protect the
remainder that is not protected by strategies applied to individual orders.
If a position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position, then this strategy is
applied to the entire position and protects it (see Eaxmple 2 below).
Exit strategies applied to positions and strategies applied to orders are visually different on both on the chart and in
the DOM: exits strategies applied to positions have p letter to the left of the number of contracts.
Example 1 - Shows exit strategy attached to an individual order:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sell limit order is filled. Profit Target becomes active. Open position is -2 contracts. Profit Target size is 1
6.
Sell market order is filled. Open position is -4 contracts. Profit Target size is 1.
235
Example 2 - Shows exit strategy auto-attached to an order opening the position from a flat position:
1.
2.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
3.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +100 contracts. Master Strategy
size is 100.
4.
5.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300 (protects entire position
since the position was opened by an order that has an exit strategy attached from a flat position).
Example 3 - Shows exit strategy attached to the entire position:
1.
2.
Buy market order for 100 contracts with a Master Strategy auto attached to it is sent to broker.
3.
Buy market order is filled. Master Strategy becomes active. Open position is +150 contracts. Master Strategy
5.
Buy Stop order is filled. Open position is +300 contracts. Master Strategy size is 300(attached to the position).
Example 4 - Shows both exit strategy attached to the entire position and exit strategy attached to an individual
order:
1.
2.
Stop-Loss #1 exit strategy is applied to the open position. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
3.
4.
Stop-Loss #2 exit strategy is applied to the buy stop order. Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
5.
Buy stop order is filled. Stop-Loss #2 becomes active. Open position is +15 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size is 10.
Stop-Loss #2 size is 5.
6.
7.
Buy market order is filled. Open position is +25 contracts. Stop-Loss #1 size becomes 20 (attached to the
Native OCO-group is used when the brokers API supports OCO-groups. In this case all OCO orders are sent to the
broker directly and unfilled OCO orders will be cancelled by the broker. (Native OCO-group is supported by
Interactive Brokers and FXCM).
Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders will be sent to the broker, but once one of them is filled, other
orders from this OCO group will be cancelled by MultiCharts. In this case, when one of the OCO orders is filled,
MultiCharts will send a command to cancel or reduce size of the second OCO order to the broker.
Please note that in case of high market volatility there may be not enough time to cancel the order and therefore
both orders may be filled. Both orders also may be filled in the unlikely event of crash or connection loss.
All OCO-orders of the same group will have the same OCO-ID. You may check it in the Orders tab of the Order and
Position Tracker window.
Calculator automatically increases the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can modify the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the left side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
Order Modification
Order modification allows modifying price level and changing the quantity of the active order that has not been filled
yet.
Modifying price levels
237
To modify an order price, drag and drop the order marker to desired price level.
To cancel price adjustment, press the Esc button before you release left mouse button.
Changing Quantity
Change quantity of the order by one of the following methods:
Click on the order marker on the chart to call context menu, select Modify Quantity and select the quantity;
or:
Click on volume value on order marker on the chart and modify the quantity in Trading Calculator (see Trading
Calculator).
Managing Multiple Orders with the same price
If you place two or more orders of the same type at the same price level, they will be displayed as one order with
the actual number of orders shown in brackets. Unlike Chart Trading panel, if you drag and drop such group of orders
in DOM, all orders will be replaced.
To modify quantity or cancel every single order in such group, right-click on the orders group in DOM to see the
shortcut menu, select Modify Quantity or Cancel Order and click on the order ID. To cancel all orders in a group,
click Cancel All Orders in this Cell.
If you place two or more orders of the same type at the same price level, they will be displayed one above the other
showing bottom order color at the right side of the displayed order. To switch between the orders click on this color
238
In case of Entry and Exit strategies to switch between different strategies click on the Switch button.
Reverse position
To reverse current position:
Right-click on the Average Entry Price highlighted in white to see the shortcut menu and click Reverse Position.
Close Position
Close the position by one of the following methods:
Right-click on the Average Entry Price highlighted in white to see the shortcut menu and select Close Position.
Closing the current position cancels the orders associated with it. It also cancels all pending orders.
Cancelling orders
Cancel separate threads or the order/strategy completely by one of the following methods:
Right-click the order to see the shortcut menu and select Cancel Order.
Resizing DOM
DOM window height can be customized. To resize the whole DOM window or change the depth, drag the bottom
of the scale.
Right click on any free space of the DOM window and click Switch To Compact/Full Mode; or:
To enable/disable Always Show Entire Number feature, right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy,
Price & Sell columns and control elements to see the shortcut menu, then check/uncheck Always Show Entire
Number feature.
240
Placing manual orders when a strategy is auto trading (the same broker, account, instrument)
2.
Auto trading from one chart window when a strategy is auto trading on a different chart (the same broker,
account, instrument)
Note: If AA mode of auto trading is used, one should not expect matching of chart position and broker position in
any case.
Depending on the direction of synchronization you need to use one or the other synchronizer script:
241
On Trade Bar
Make a right-click on chart and the select the first option Place Order.
2.
In the dropdown list there are several options for entries and exits:
Note: There are 2 requirements for the Place Order option to appear when you make a right-click on the chart:
1.
2.
If you don't see the Place Order option, then one of the requirements is not fulfilled.
Entry Orders
Place a Buy/Sell Limit order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
Place a Buy/Sell Stop order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
Place a Buy/Sell Stop Limit order for a specified number of contracts at the clicked price level
Exit Orders
Breakout Strategy
Fade Strategy
Note: The number of contracts should be specified in the Setting Order Quantity field on Chart Trading Panel. Setting
the number of contracts in Trade Bar will not affect Place Order option.
Bracket
242
Appearance
Bracket Strategy is displayed as green and maroon markers on the chart connected to the order price label on the
price scale with a dotted line and as green and maroon markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, Default Bracket Strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Bracket Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are
indicated as semi-transparent.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply To
Open Position.
Bracket Parameters
To modify default Bracket Parameters:
1.
2.
Click Edit
3.
Modify profit target and stop loss values in Profit Target and Stop Loss boxes.
Profit target and stop loss levels can be both set as price levels or offsets. Click the Price Level button or the Offset
button to switch between entry modes.
Offset values can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
Bracket offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Bracket Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto Attach
to Orders; or:
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Bracket exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save
4.
5.
6.
Click OK
Breakeven
Breakeven
Breakeven is a conservative exit strategy for exiting the market
without losing any money (counting your transaction costs). If a
long position is held, then the strategy will place a sell stop; and
vice versa, if a short position is held, then it will place a buy stop.
Define the profit needed to trigger this order, and once it
triggers it will become active. If the price is reached, then the
order will be executed.
Appearance
Breakeven Exit Strategy is displayed as yellow marker on the chart
connected to the order price label on the price scale with a dotted
line and as yellow marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in
Format Chart Trading menu.
244
For the DOM window, default Breakeven Exit Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Breakeven Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are
indicated as semi-transparent.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
To Open Position.
2.
Click Edit
3.
Modify activate at profit and transaction costs values in Activate at Profit and Transaction Costs boxes.
Activate at Profit level defines the profit level needed to trigger breakeven. It may be set in ticks or percent.
Transaction costs level defines the level of the breakeven order taking into account the transaction
costs/commission that should be paid in order to exit the market without losing any money. Transaction Costs
level can be set in ticks or percent.
To change level indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More parameters >> to show Time In Force box (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Breakeven Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Breakeven exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Appearance
Breakout down/fade strategy orders are displayed as dark cyan
markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on the price
scale with a dotted line and as dark cyan markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, default Breakout down /fade strategy order
Breakout Strategy in the DOM window
markers color and connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart
Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakout down /fade strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors
menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Breakout Down/Fade Strategy; or:
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakdown and Upper limit levels in Upper Limit At and Breakdown At boxes.
Breakdown and Upper limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Breakout Down/Fade Strategy
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
247
Breakout
A breakout is usually defined as a sudden and significant price
movement through the support and resistance levels, usually followed
by large trading volume and increased volatility. A breakout trader will
buy if the price goes up through the resistance level and sell if the price
goes down through the support level, assuming that the motion will
continue.
The Breakout Strategy will place two stop orders at the prices
( distance) specified, in order to catch the breakout when it happens. A
buy stop order will be placed above the current price and a sell stop
order below the current price.
Appearance
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click
Apply Strategy.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Breakout/Breakdown levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either Breakout/Breakdown level
or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated in ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Appearance
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy orders are displayed as sienna markers on
the chart connected to the order price labels on the price scale with a
dotted line and as sienna markers in the DOM window. For the chart
window, default Breakout up/fade strategy order
Breakout Strategy on the chart markers color and connecting lines length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakout up/fade strategy order markers color can be modified in Format Colors
menu.
249
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
select Place Strategy and then click Breakout Up/Fade Strategy; or:
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify Breakout and Lower limit values in Breakout At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Breakout and lower limit levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Breakout Up/Fade Strategy
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
250
Fade Strategy
Fading is usually defined as trading against the trend, a mirror-image
of the breakout. If the market goes up, fading traders will sell, hoping
that the price will go down. Similarly, fading traders will buy if the price
goes down.
The Fade Strategy will place two limit orders at the prices (distance)
specified, so fading can start when the price moves. A buy limit order
will be placed below the current price and a sell limit order above the
current price.
Appearance
Fade Strategy orders are displayed as olive drab markers on the chart connected to the order price labels on
the price scale with a dotted line Fade Strategy in the DOM window and as olive drab markers in the DOM window.
For the chart window, default Fade Strategy order marker color and connecting line length can be modified in
Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Fade Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
Strategy.
1.
2.
Click Edit.
3.
Modify upper and lower limits values in Upper Limit At and Lower Limit At boxes.
Upper and lower limits levels are interrelated with price offsets. You may modify either level or the price offset.
Click the Price Level button or the Price Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Price offsets can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
Click More Parameters >> to show Qty and Time In Force fields (for more info see Setting Order Quantity and Time
in Force sections).
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK
Limit Order
A Limit Order will buy or sell a set number of shares at a specified
price or better.
Appearance
Limit Orders on the chart
window; or:
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
in the Place Order menu (Buy Limit order at Bid price will be created).
Master Strategy
The Master Exit Strategy is a multi-level strategy where all components interact closely
with one another. Multiple bracket levels, trailing stops, breakevens, and all levels may
be set so they are constantly synced with one another. Its an essential tool for scalingin and scaling-out of positions and for pyramiding positions.
Appearance
The appearance of the Master Strategy in the DOM window and on the chart depens
on the selected type of orders to be used in it. Master Strategy can include visual
markers of the Bracket, Breakeven and Trailing Stop strategies.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading
menu.
For the DOM window, default Breakeven Exit Strategy order marker color can be
modified in Format Colors menu.
253
Note: When Master Strategy is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered
yet, inactive orders are indicated as semi-transparent.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check
2.
Click Edit
3.
Set the desirable Number of Levels in the Number of Levels box. Master strategy allows using up to 4 levels.
4.
Modify profit target and stop loss values for each level in Profit Target and Stop Loss boxes.
Click the Price Level button or the Offset button to switch between entry modes.
Offset values can be indicated as ticks or %. To change indication type, click the Tick/Percent button.
For each master strategy level the strategy type can be selected:
Master Strategy
Check Breakeven check box (see Breakeven Strategy) to apply this strategy type to a particular level.
Check Trailing Stop check box (see Trailing Stop Strategy) to apply this strategy type to a particular level. If
both these types are unchecked, the Master Strategy level will work as a Bracket Strategy (see Bracket Strategy).
Contracts quantity can be set in percents of total contracts or directly in numbers of contracts. To change
quantity type, click on the Qty button.
Click More parameters >> to show Time In Force box (see Time in Force section) and Stop Loss type buttons.
Stop Loss type buttons allow to choose the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
254
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Master Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Master Strategy exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save
as Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click 'Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Profit Target
A profit target is a limit order placed ahead of time to define how much profit must be attained before the position
is closed and the profit is realized (i.e. contracts either bought or sold to reduce or close the position).
Appearance
Profit Target Strategy is displayed as green marker on the chart connected to the order price label on the price scale
with a dotted line and as green marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Profit Target order marker color can be modified
in Format Colors menu.
255
Note: When Profit Target is auto attached to an order and has not been
triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated as semi-transparent.
to an active order or
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the
shortcut menu, select Attach Exit Strategy and click Profit Target.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
To Open Position.
2.
Click Edit
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note: In real-time trading Profit target values are based on the average entry price provided by the broker
((execution price + commission) / position size). Some brokers may not include the commission. If the price does
not conform to the minimum price variation Profit Target value is rounded up.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (for more info see Time in Force section).
To save custom parameters, click Save.
256
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Profit Target Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, the Auto
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Profit Target exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Appearance
For the chart window, default Stop Limit Order marker color and connecting
line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Stop Limit Order marker color can be modified
in Format Colors menu.
257
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
Right-click at the desired price level on the DOM window on the Sell or Buy columns to see the shortcut menu,
in Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop Limit order at Ask price will
be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu.
If you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop Limit option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking
on the current price level makes both Buy Stop Limit and Sell Stop Limit options available.
Stop Limit Order
Right-click on the chart to see the shortcut menu and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
Right-click on the Chart Trading panel to see the shortcut menu, and then click Format Chart Trading; or:
2.
3.
4.
Right-click anywhere on the DOM window except for Buy, Price & Sell columns and control elements to see
the shortcut menu and check Require Order Confirmation check box; or:
When Require Order Confirmation check box is checked, you may customize Stop Limit offset in confirmation
3.
Stop Loss
Stop order specifies a price at which to buy or sell. It is called a Stop Loss
because it is used to define how much loss is tolerable before a position will
be exited. When the specified price is reached the order becomes a market
Stop Loss Order on the chart
Appearance
Stop Loss Strategy is displayed as maroon marker on the chart connected to
the order price label on the price scale with a dotted line and as maroon
marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, Connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Stop Loss order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Stop Loss is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated as
semi-transparent.
2.
3.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Right-click on the active order or open position in the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply To
Open Position.
259
2.
Click Edit
3.
1.
2.
Stop Loss
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note: In real-time trading Stop loss values are based on the average entry price provided by the broker ((execution
price + commission) / position size). Some brokers may not include the commission. If the price does not conform
to the minimum price variation Stop loss value is rounded down.
Click More Parameters >> to show Time In Force field (for more info see Time in Force section).
Stop Loss Type buttons allow choosing the type of the Stop Loss order: Stop Market or Stop Limit with adjustable
offset.
To save custom parameters, click Save.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Stop Loss Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check Auto
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
Note: When Stop Loss exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach
feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
260
Saving as Template
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click on the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save
4.
5.
6.
Click OK
Stop Order
Stop Order
A Stop Order will buy or sell a security when its price surpasses a particular
level defined by the trader, thus ensuring a greater probability of achieving a
predetermined entry or exit price. Stop order becomes a market order when
the price reaches the predefined level.
Appearance
Stop Order is displayed as sienna marker on the chart connected to the order
price label on the price scale with a dotted line and as sienna marker in the
DOM window.
For the chart window, default Stop Order marker color and connecting line
length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Stop Order marker color can be modified in
Format Colors menu.
261
window; or:
Right-click at the desired price level in Sell or Buy columns of the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, then
Right-click at the desired price level on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Place Order and then click
in the Place Order menu to see the shortcut menu and click Apply
in the Place Order menu (Buy Stop order at Ask price will be created).
Note: Chart is context-sensitive and allows creating Buy or Sell orders depending on the price level at which you click
on the chart. If you right-click above current price level, Buy Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. If
you right-click below current price level, Sell Stop option will be available in the shortcut menu. Right-clicking on the
current price level makes both Buy Stop and Sell Stop options available.
Trailing Stop
A trailing stop is a smart stop order that recognizes that losing only a
certain % of money is acceptable, and a hard price level isnt always
appropriate. A trailing stop will effectively follow the current positions
profit, and it will execute if the price goes in the opposite direction.
However, if the trailing stop is set too tight, in a volatile market a position
can be closed before it really is desirable.
Trailing Stop Exit Strategy on the chart
262
Appearance
Trailing Stop Strategy is displayed as orange marker on the chart connected to the order price label on the price
scale with a dotted line and as orange marker in the DOM window.
For the chart window, connecting line length can be modified in Format Chart Trading menu.
For the DOM window, default Trailing Stop Exit Strategy order marker color can be modified in Format Colors menu.
Note: When Trailing Stop is auto attached to an order and has not been triggered yet, inactive orders are indicated
as semi-transparent.
Right-click on the active order or open position on the chart to see the shortcut menu, select Attach Exit
Right-click on the active order or open position on the DOM window to see the shortcut menu, select Attach
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu and check Apply
2.
Click Edit
3.
Set the desirable Number of Levels and amounts of profit and stop loss in the Number of Level box.
4.
Modify amounts of profit and stop loss values for each level in Amount of Profit and Stop Loss boxes.
Auto Attach
Auto Attach Trailing Stop Exit Strategy to orders by one of the following methods:
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then check
Enable Auto Attach to Orders feature in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
263
Note: When Trailing Stop exit strategy is auto attached, custom parameters will be used.
When one or several Exit Strategies auto attached, the Pause/Auto Apply button with the number of auto attached
exit strategies in brackets will be shown in Exit Strategy menu. Click Pause to temporarily disable auto attach feature.
When auto attach feature is paused, no Exit Strategies will be automatically applied to an each new entry.
To re-enable auto attach feature click Auto Apply.
Saving as Template
To save the parameters as a template:
1.
in the Exit Strategy menu to see the shortcut menu, then click Save as
Template; or:
Click the Save as Template button in the Place Strategy window when applying the strategy.
2.
3.
Click Save.
4.
5.
6.
Click OK.
264
Trade Bar
Trade Bar allows navigating between the brokers and trading with a few clicks. It contains a series of tabs that shows
all the brokers for which you have created broker profiles, this allows you to click on the appropriate broker tab and
execute trades to that broker.
Trade Bar also shows you which broker connections are currently active by showing a green light next to broker
name and which ones are offline by showing a red light. It is a very convenient tool for placing orders without plotting
charts or using DOM windows.
The main advantage is that you can see all of the currently connected brokers and place orders through several
brokers at the same time. For example, you may have one broker for Forex and another one for futures, and place
orders on both without logging in or out.
Select View In the main menu and enable/disable Show Trade Bar feature; or:
on the Trade Bar shows Broker Profile connection status which is not the
same as Data Feed connection status. For more info see and
Selecting Account
Select the account number in the Account Selector box
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
265
Note: To be able to trade the instrument from Trade Bar, you should add it to the Quote Manager (see Operating
Symbol List).
Calculator automatically increments the current trade size setting by one, e.g. if you had 1 in order quantity field,
calculator would automatically make it 2.
You can adjust the number of contracts by pressing +1, +2, +5 etc. buttons. Zero button resets the number of
contracts to zero.
Buttons on the left side of the calculator contain 6 last values.
You may set this number of contracts by pressing those buttons. To apply the modifications click OK, to cancel the
modifications click Cancel.
allows you to set the price of your order with just a few clicks. It also shows Bid
266
When the order type is chosen, place an order by pressing the Buy Mkt / LMT / STP / STL
Mkt / LMT / STP / STL
or the Sell
Order Size is defined by Qty field, Time In Force is defined by the value set in the Time In Force field (see Setting
Order Quantity and Setting Time In Force).
If the market type of order is selected then the market price is chosen by default.
If the limit/stop/stop limit type of order is selected then limit/ stop/ stop limit price box comes up where you can
set stop and limit prices.
Select the price by one of the following methods:
Enter the price manually in the Limit/Stop/Stop Limit Price box; or:
Note: if you do not see the order on the chart/in DOM window and/or do not see any change in your current position
(in case of a market order), please check the Logs tab of Order and Order_and_Position_Tracker for error messages
( e.g. Order Breaks Limits ).
267
Strategy Trading
Auto Trading
Auto Trading Tab
Require Order Confirmation
It is possible to manually confirm or reject strategy order transmission to the order execution gateway. Order
Confirmation is set in the Auto Trading tab of the Strategy Properties window: Require Order Confirmation
To learn more, see Setting Up Auto Trading in MultiCharts
With Order Confirmation selected, each time that one or more orders are generated, a New Order dialog box
displaying the orders will appear in the center of the desktop. To confirm order transmission, click Transmit Orders,
and to prevent order transmission, click Ignore Orders.
When more than one order is displayed in the New Order dialog box, it is not possible to transmit one order
and ignore another; ether all of the orders are transmitted, or all of the orders are ignored.
If neither Transmit Orders or Ignore Orders is selected before a new Market order or set of Market orders is
generated, or before a new bar is started, the previous order or set of orders is ignored and not sent to the
execution gateway.
Note: Order transmission confirmation affects only the transmission of the strategy order to the execution gateway;
once the order has been transmitted, execution of the order by the broker is subject to market conditions.
Audio Alert
If the feature is turned on, it triggers a sound alert when an order placed by a strategy from the chart is filled. Once
the box is checked, the File field becomes active and allows you to locate a sound file to play when an order is filled.
To select the file, click the "..." button. It is possible to specify if the sound file should be played once or repeated by
selecting one of these options below the File field. After the file is specified, one can try it by clicking the Test button.
Note: Only .wav file format is supported.
269
The first one converts unexecuted limit/stop only entry orders to market orders after X seconds.
2.
The second one converts unexecuted limit/stop only exit orders to market orders after X seconds.
Note: If one of the described boxes is checked, then an entry/exit order maybe converted into a market order almost
at once simply because price hit its level, but the order queue is too long and the order fails to be filled.
2.
Note: Without enabled Intra-Bar Order Generation (IOG) the strategy will be recalculated, but it will place no new
orders intrabar because of this setting.
Note 2: If strategy generates both entry and exit orders at the same time when there is no market position opened,
only the entry order will be sent. When the market position is opened, the exit orders will be placed intrabar even
without enabled Intra-Bar Order Generation (IOG), no matter if this feature is used or not.
From Broker: Asks and Bids are taken from the connected broker.
2.
a)
If it is Classic Backtesting, then the data is taken from the data series 1;
b)
If it is Extended Backtesting (see Precise Backtesting) , then the data is taken from the Ask and Bid subseries.
Mode Selection
Automated execution from chart can be turned on in one of two available modes: synchronous and asynchronous:
In synchronous mode [SA] one can see the same open market position and active orders on the chart as at
broker. All orders generated by historical calculation during are wiped out from the chart when auto execution is
turned on. Executed order is displayed only if it has been executed at broker and the final status of the order has
been received by MultiCharts.To use synchronous mode for auto trading select Entries/Exits are based on the
execution confirmation by the broker (Sync)
Note: Chart market position and broker market position are in synch only if no more than one chart is auto
trading without any manual orders on a particular symbol connected a particular broker account, assuming that at
270
the moment the automation was turned the broker market position was flat or, if it was not flat at broker,
assigned manually on start of auto trading in MC to match it (see Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker
Settings). If more than 1 chart is auto trading in [SA] mode and/or manual trading is used as the same time on the
same symbol at broker, chart can easily get out of synch. To learn more, see Trading from Multiple Charts on One
Instrument.
In asynchronous mode [AA] the strategy on the chart starts auto trading based on the historically calculated
orders and open position, displaying all generated by the script orders on chart even if an order was not executed
at broker. In AA strategy on chart acts separately from broker.
To use asynchronous mode for auto trading select Entries/Exits are independent of the execution status at the
broker (Async)
Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Dialogue
By default it this variant is selected. If market position on the chart is not flat and automation is turned on, than
the Assign the Initial Market Position Dialogue window will pop up. There the direction of current market position,
number of open contracts, average entry price and maximum position profit amount can be put.
Note: The Show Always box should be checked to get the Assign the Initial Market Position Dialogue every time
the automation is enabled, no matter what is the strategy position by that moment. It is extremely important for
[SA] mode, because it is always flat when automation is turned on in [SA].
Do not Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Dialogue When this variant is selected it
Assume the Initial Market Position at the Broker is always FLAT when automation is enabled.Example:
Assume that according to your backtesting the current position is 1 contract long and your real broker position is 1
contract short. With this option you will have +1 on your chart, flat for auto trading engine within the software and
-1 short at broker, when the automation is turned on.
Assume the Initial Market Position at the Broker is the SAME AS on the CHART when automation is
enabled.
Example: If the first Broker Profile on the Trade Bar is Dukascopy and a new chart is created using eSignal data feed,
then Dukascopy will be selected by default as the broker plug-in for automated trading.
To change a Broker Plug-in for a particular chart, click the arrow in the Broker Plug-in field to get a dropdown list
and choose the required one.
Settings of the Plug-in can be adjusted and become different from the corresponding Broker Profile settings. Not all
the settings are the same, to learn more about particular Broker Plug-ins, see here Broker Plug-ins.
2.
Select Window.
3.
In the Format Window dialogue box, select the Status Line tab.
4.
5.
it.
Click on Move Up or Move Down to change the order and the location. To remove it from the chart, deselect
Any changes are made to the symbol chart or charts, to which the strategy is applied: chart reload, adding,
removing, changing any of the symbols or their request parameters that result in the strategy's recalculation (not to
be confused with receiving historical data).
Connectivity between MultiCharts and the execution gateway has been lost and the disconnection time
i_MarketPosition_at_Broker_for_The_Strategy
MarketPosition_at_Broker
MarketPosition_at_Broker_for_The_Strategy
273
Note: If you get this message, please make sure that you have enabled API connections in your order execution
gateway. Please refer to your gateway's documentation.
Connection to order execution gateway has been lost
Note: Once the connection to order execution gateway is restored, the Connection to order execution
gateway has been established message will be displayed.
An order has been Filled
274
Note: An order can be rejected if the symbol was not set up correctly in QuoteManager. If this message appears,
please verify that the Price Scale, Min Movement, and Big Point Value settings for the symbol are AutoTrading Status
Messages
Note: Please see Automatic Termination of Auto Trading for an explanation of when auto trading is
automatically turned off.
Note: This message is displayed when the last auto trading enabled chart is closed.
Determine the symbol to plot on a chart. In QuoteManager, verify that that the Price Scale, Min Movement,
and Big Point Value settings for the symbol are correct. MultiCharts will have the correct settings for most of the
symbols, but it is not possible to cover every symbol. If these settings are not correct, then the chart will not plot
properly and orders may be rejected by the execution gateway. To learn more, see Setting Properties.
2.
Create a chart of the necessary symbol. To learn more, see Creating Charts.
3.
Add the necessary signals to the chart. To learn more, see Using Studies.
4.
Set signal and strategy properties. To learn more, see Signal Settings and Strategy Properties.
5.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
275
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
6.
7.
Select the Require order confirmation check box to have the opportunity to confirm or reject each order before
Select Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders check box to automatically convert the remaining portion of a
partially filled limit order into a market order. For example, there is a sell limit order above the market price for 10
contracts. The trading price touches the sell limit price, but pulls back. Six of the contracts are filled and the remaining
four contracts are unfilled. MultiCharts will convert the sell limit order for the remaining contracts to a sell market
order at the close of the bar. (e.g., If the chart is plotting 5 minute bars, then the remaining portion of the limit order
will be converted to a market order at the close of the 5 minute bar.)
Note: As long as there is a partially filled order, MultiCharts will always convert the order as described in this step
regardless of any settings that are in Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement. If the order was not partially filled and
Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement was turned on, then MultiCharts will convert the order according to the
settings in Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement.
9.
Select the Show order execution status check box to have a status message displayed every time an order is
sent, canceled, filled, or rejected, or any other informational message is received from the gateway application.
10. Select the Audio Alert check box and choose a sound file to activate an audio alert every time a notification
window appears.
Selecting an Alert Sound File:
1.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... http://
www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ portfolio/ ellipse. gif button on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box,
navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
2.
3.
Select Play Once or Repeat for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
In the Mode Selection section, there are two options: synchronous and asynchronous mode.
1.
Select Entries/Exits are based on the execution confirmation by the broker (Sync) option for synchronous
Select Entries/Exits are independent of the execution confirmation by the broker (Async) option in the
Mode Selection section for Asynchronous auto trading mode (AA). If AA is selected, two group boxes become
available.
Unfilled Strategy Order Replacement
This feature gives the strategy the ability to automatically convert limit orders or stop orders into market orders
after a certain period of time.
276
Select Convert unexecuted limit or stop entry orders to market orders check box to convert unexecuted
limit or stop entry orders to market after a specified number of seconds. Enter the number of seconds in the list
box.
Select Convert unexecuted limit or stop exit orders to market orders check box to convert unexecuted limit
or stop exit orders to market after a specified number of seconds. Enter the number of seconds in the list box.
Note: The waiting period for converting unfilled limit or stop orders to market orders must be less than the
duration of a single bar.
Note: As long as the order is completely unfilled, MultiCharts will always convert the order as described in this step
regardless of any settings under Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders. If there is a partially filled order and
Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders was turned on, then MultiCharts will convert the order according to the
settings in Replace to Market Partially Filled Orders.
Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker Settings
To learn more, see Synchronization of Market Position in Auto Trading Mode.
Select Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker radio button to display a dialog box to input
the initial position and average entry price. This dialog box will appear when auto trading is turned on in the chart
(see last step).
Select Do not show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker radio button to set the initial
position here instead of in the dialog box. There are two choices:
Select Assume the initial market position at the broker FLAT to set the initial position to 0.
Select Assume the initial market position at the broker the SAME AS on the CHART to set the initial position
SA Mode
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and select Automate Order Execution.
2.
3.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
AA Mode
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and select Automate Order Execution.
2.
3.
If Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker dialogue was selected earlier, then a dialog box
will appear.
Enter the initial market position and average entry price. Then select Yes.
4.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
277
SA Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
AA Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If Show the Assign the Initial Market Position at the Broker dialog was selected earlier, then the dialog box
will appear. Input the initial market position and average entry price. Then select Yes.
6.
The button will turn green which means auto trading is on.
2.
1.
Select the Auto Trading Status Switch and deselect Automate Order Execution.
2.
If there are orders pending, a dialog box will appear to ask if pending orders should be cancelled. Select Cancel
If there are open positions, a dialog box will appear to ask if open positions should be closed. Select Close
The Auto Trading Status Switch will turn gray which means auto trading is turned off.
1.
2.
If there are orders pending, a dialog box will appear to ask if pending orders should be cancelled. Select Cancel
If there are open positions, a dialog box will appear to ask if open positions should be closed. Select Close
The Auto Trading Status Switch will turn gray which means auto trading is turned off.
Note: If the workspace (or MultiCharts) was closed while auto trading mode was enabled on one or several charts,
a dialogue asking you if you want to enable auto trading on these charts on restart. Click Yes to enable auto trading
or No to open charts with auto trading disabled.
When a customer uses 2 or more separate charts and auto trade from these charts on the same instrument on the
same account of the same broker, then the strategies that are used on the charts are not connected in anyway (if
global variables are not used in their scripts to pass values between them). Even if MarketPosition_at_broker is used,
it simply can get the real position from broker, but the actual position on chart may differ in this case. The following
example can demonstrate a simple possible scenario of trading from 2 charts on the same instrument:
Example:
Market position at broker = 0. Market position on each chart = 0.
If your strategy on chart A generates a long entry, then the strategy on chart B doesn't know about it.
If the strategy on Chart B goes short, then chart A also doesn't know about it.
So the strategies continue trading individually on their charts, preserving their chart positions.
However, since the instrument at broker is the same, the market position at broker on the instrument is the net
position of the orders sent from both charts. In this example the position will be flat after 1 order from each chart.
If the chart A sends short entry order after this, which is reverse in fact, then the broker receives 2 contracts order
from MC at this moments: 1 contract is to close open +1 long position (chart A assumes that it is still open) that is in
fact an order to sell 1 contract; and another 1 contract is to open -1 short position.
If we take into consideration that the real broker position by that moment is 0, then it gets sell 1 contract and sell
another 1 contract, the actual position at broker for this instrument becomes -2.
The chart B still assumes that the position is -1 meanwhile. Similar scenario but in the opposite direction would have
taken place if the reverse order had been sent from chart B.
The main thing one should keep in mind trading from different chart windows by script on the same broker
instrument is that the real broker position in most cases does not match chart positions.
Strategy Synchronizers for Multiple Chart Windows and Manual Orders During
Enabled Auto Execution
Among prebuilt standard signals in MultiCharts there are 2 scripts that were introduced specifically for comparing
market positions at broker and on chart to synchronize one of them with the other if they differ. Essentially there
are 2 possible expected scenarios when market positions can get out of synch (only SA mode of autotrading is
considered):
1.
Placing manual orders when a strategy is auto trading (the same broker, account, instrument )
2.
Auto trading from one chart window when a strategy is auto trading on a different chart (the same broker,
account, instrument)
Note: If AA mode of auto trading is used, one should not expect matching of chart position and broker position in
any case.
Depending on the direction of synchronization, the strategy works in 2 different ways:
The same symbol can be traded from more than one chart but it may cause a market position conflict between
the charts. For more information see Trading from Multiple Charts on One Instrument section.
280
2.
The market position at the broker must be 0 at the time when auto trading is launched.
3.
A trader must not trade the symbol directly through the broker's platform while trading the same symbol
At the moment of connection loss, the broker did not send notifications about complete order filling or
cancellation.
Understanding Automated Trade Execution
Pro
Con
Synchronous
Asynchronous
Strategy Properties
Strategy properties are separate from the individual signals' settings, affect all the signals applied to a chart, and
regulate the actions of a group of signals as a whole.
Strategy properties include Costs/Capitalization, Maximum bars back, Position limits, and Trade size sections.
Setting Costs/Capitalization
Cost/Capitalization section includes Commission, Slippage, and Initial Capital and Interest Rate settings.
Strategy properties are set from the Properties tab of the Strategy Properties window:
1.
1. Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the chart
and then click Format Signals.
The Format Objects window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
2.
3.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, in the Commission Rule list, select the Commission Rule;
Click Manage Rules... to change existing rules or add a new one. Click here to learn ho to operate Commission
Rules Manager.
4.
5.
In the Initial Capital box, enter the Initial Capital, and in the Interest Rate box, enter the interest rate to be
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
2.
3.
In the Maximum Bars Back box enter the maximum number of bars the signals will reference.
Note: The Maximum Bars Back value should not exceed the actual number of bars plotted on the chart.
282
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
2.
3.
1. Check the Allow up to N entry orders in the same direction as the currently held position checkbox.
Strategy Properties
2.
Enter the maximum number of entries into the entry orders box.
3.
Select when the order is generated by a different entry order to limit entries to one per each entry order, or
select regardless of the entry that generated the order to allow multiple entries by the same entry order.
To prevent multiple same-direction entry orders, clear the Allow up to N entry orders in the same direction as
In the Maximum shares/contracts per position box, enter the maximum position limit.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
Select Fixed Shares/Contracts to specify the trade size by number of shares or contracts, and enter the number
Select Dollars per Trade to specify the trade size by currency value of the transaction, and enter the currency
Commission Rules
Commission settings in Strategy properties are designed to make backtesting and real-time simulation more realistic.
They also affect strategy order prices calculation in auto trading (i.e. trailing stops, profit targets) as well as Stategy
and Trading Performance Reports. Flexible commission settings templates are based on major broker commissions
allowing to configure auto trading the way you each user needs.
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
0.01$ per Contract. Commission is set to $0.01 per contract regardless of the trade size.
0.01% per Contract. Commission is set to 0.01% of trade value regardless of the trade size.
1$ per Trade. Commission is set to $1 per trade regardless of the trade size.
Tiered per Month. Commission is set to 0.01% of trade value if trade size is less than 9999, 0.005% of trade
value if trade size is between 10000 and 99999, 0.0025% of trade value if trade size is equal or higher than 100000.
Every template parameter can be changed. In most cases default templates should be enough. However, if it is not
the case custom templates can be created.
in real-time. Commission is calculated in real-time, after every filled contract inside one order. If your
order falls on two or more commission levels, commission will be calculated for each portion and
then added.
Example 1:
After every trade is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
0-99 $0.05 per Contract
100-999 $0.03 per Contract
>=1000 $0.01 per Contract
The strategy buys 60 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 60 = $3
The strategy sells 150 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 99 + $0.03 * 51 = $6.48
The strategy buys 3000 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 99 + $0.03 *900 + $0.01 * $2001 = $51.96
Example 2:
285
First day of the next month: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy sells 50 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 50 = $2.5
The strategy sells 50 contracts - commission = $0.05 * 49 + $0.03 * 1 = $2.48
after every trade. Commission is calculated after the entire order is processed. If your order falls on
two or more commission levels, commission level corresponding to the entire order size will be
applied.
Example 3:
After every trade is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $1.25 per Trade
>=1000 $1.5 per Trade
The strategy buys 60 contracts - commission = $1
The strategy sells 150 contracts - commission = $1.25
The strategy buys 3000 contracts - commission = $1.5
286
Example 4:
Monthly is selected in the Reset Volume Counter list.
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $0.75 per Trade
>=1000 $0.5 per Trade
First day: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy buys 10 contracts - accumulated voume = 10 - commission = $1
The strategy sells 20 contracts - accumulated voume = 30 - commission = $1
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 130 - commission = $0.75
The strategy buys 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 230 - commission = $0.75
First day ends: accumulated volume for the month = 10 + 30 + 100= 230
Second day
The strategy sells 100 contracts - accumulated voume = 330 - commission = $0.75
...
First day of the next month: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated voume = 50 - commission = $1
The strategy sells 50 contracts - accumulated voume = 100 - commission = $0.75
once per day. Commission is calculated based on the number of contracts traded from the first
calendar day of the month till the end of the previous calendar day for all orders processed during
the current day.
Note: Once per day option is available only when Monthly accumulation period is selected in the
Calculate Commission list..
Example 5:
Commission rules:
>0 $1 per Trade
>=100 $0.75 per Trade
>=1000 $0.5 per Trade
First day: accumulated volume for the month = 0
The strategy buys 10 contracts - accumulated volume = 0 - commission = $1
287
2.
3.
4.
Check the Commission Limits check box to enable commission maximum and minimum values.
1.
Check the Min Value check box, setup the minimum commission value and select per
Contract / per Trade calculation mode.
2.
Check the Max Value check box, setup the maximum commission value and select per
Contract / per Trade calculation mode.
Example 6: Commission rule is set to $0.1 per contract. Min Value is set to $1 per trade and Max
Value is set to 5$ per trade. If the strategy sells 5 contracts, the commission will be $1. If the
strategy buys 100 contracts, the commission will be $5.
5.
Click OK to save the Fixed Commission Rule or Cancel to cancel the operation.
6.
To edit an existing Fixed Commission Rule select a rule with the mouse and click Edit...'.
7.
To delete a Fixed Commission Rule select a rule with the mouse and click Delete'.
8.
To clone an existing rule, select the rule by clicking it with the mouse click Clone....
To delete a rule, select the rule by clicking it with the mouse click Delete.
To save the changes and close Commission Rules Manager click OK
To exit Commission Rules Manager without saving any changes to the rules click Cancel.
Understanding Strategies
A strategy is a set of signals, applied to a chart.
Signals systematically specify market entry or exit points according to a set of trading rules implemented in the
signals' algorithms, and can be viewed as the basic building blocks of strategies.
While signals can be based on the same formulas as indicators, signal calculations are substantially more complex
and take in to account a far greater number of factors, such as trading costs, order generation priorities, and strategy
performance measurements, that affect market entry and exit conditions. Signal algorithms utilize price action
models and make use of backtesting concepts. Signal logic can make assumptions about price movement within bars
that allow appropriate market entry and exit points to be determined when intra-bar data is not available. Signals
compile strategy performance data and support backtesting and Automated Trade Execution.
Over 100 pre-built, customizable signals, covering the most popular trading concepts, are already included with the
platform, and additional signals can be imported from a variety of sources.
Signals can be fully customized, or entirely new signals created, using PowerLanguage scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor. Strategies are constructed by simply applying a set of signals to a chart window, without the need to combine
signal code manually.
To learn about applying signals to a chart, see Using Studies
To learn about signal settings, see Signal Settings
Market entry or exit points, specified by the signals, can be used to send orders electronically directly to the broker,
fully automating the trading process.
To learn more, see Automated Trade Execution
Strategy Properties, separate from the individual signals' settings, regulate the actions of a group of signals as a
whole.
An essential part of developing a trading strategy is Strategy Backtesting. To learn more, see Backtesting
Strategy Alerts
Alert is a visual or/and audio notification triggered when the market conditions meet the criteria specified in the
signal. Audio and visual alerts can be enabled simultaneously.
Alerts can only be used with the signals containing Alert Triggering Conditions code. Most, but not all, signals contain
alerts. To learn how to add alerts to signals' code refer to the PowerLanguage manual. A check for the alert triggering
conditions is performed whenever one of the following events occurs:
289
Workspace is opened
Enabling Alerts
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
Check the Enable Alerts check box to enable alerts; uncheck the box to disable the alerts.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
In the Alert Conditions Check section click the On Bar Close, Every Tick or the Once Per Bar radio button, to
select the alert triggering conditions to be checked at the close of each bar only, every time a new tick is received or
every time a new tick is received once per bar only, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Audio Alerts
A PC speaker beep or a sound file played by the PCs sound card can be set as the audio alert type.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
Click the Beep radio button to set the PC speaker beep as the audio alert type.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
In the Audio Alert section, check the Audio Alert check box to enable audio alerts; uncheck the box to disable
Click the Sound radio button to select a .wav sound file as the audio alert type.
5.
Enter the path and name of the wave (.wav) sound file to be used into the File text box, or click the ... button
on the right side of the text box for Open dialog box, navigate to and select a sound file, and click the Open button.
6.
7.
Click the Play Once or the Repeat radio button, for the alerts to be played once or repeatedly, respectively.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
Visual Alert
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window.
To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
In the Visual Alert section, check the Visual Alert check box to enable visual alerts; uncheck the box to disable
In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list box select the length of time that the alert notification window
is to be displayed for.
Tip: To use these alert settings as the default for all signals, check Use as Default check box.
E-mail Alert
E-mail alerts can be sent when market conditions meet your defined criteria.
This feature can be used to stay informed about market conditions while away from the computer.
To add alert to signal:
1. Make sure the signal's PowerLanguage code contains alert code so that alerts will be triggered.
Alerts can be enabled in the Strategy Properties window. To enable alerts:
1.
In the main MultiCharts menu select Format and click Strategy properties.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the Settings button. The E-mail Alert window will appear.
6.
7.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
8.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
Check the SMTP Server authentication data checkbox if your SMTP server requires authentication to send
291
If the sending process has been unsuccessful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
11. Press OK to close the E-mail Alert window.Example of Email Alert Message:
292
Broker Plug-ins
CQG Broker Plug-in
To connect MultiCharts to CQG data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed on the computer. CQG has
2 programs that can be used for connection MultiCharts to CQG :
1.
http://www.cqg.com/Support/ Getting-Started/CQGT.aspx
2.
http://www.cqg.com/Products/CQG-API.aspx
Authority section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
293
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
A condition used on a buy or sell order to instruct the broker to fill the order completely or not at all. Read more:
http://www.investopedia. com/terms/a/aon.asp#ixzz22Dg5BBG7
IOC (Immediate-or-Cancel)
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
294
Authority section
Select one of the two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
295
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of 4 available Time In Force order parameters:
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
297
3.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
3.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
298
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in
There is price ceiling for stop orders. Any orders beyond this limit are rejected by broker.
On some exchanges (for example: SGX), a stop order and stop prices of a stop-limit order cannot be modified.
Trading Technologies does not support Native One-Cancels-Others group. In this case MultiCharts emulates OCO
group on its end. Simulated OCO-group means that all OCO orders are sent to the broker, price is monitored by
MultiCharts and once one of the orders is filled, other orders from this OCO group are cancelled by MultiCharts.
When one of the OCO orders is filled, MultiCharts sends a command to cancel the second OCO order to broker. Note
that the second order may also be filled if price reaches its level before the cancellation is processed by the broker
(see OCO-Orders Risk).
299
Trading section.
Account number
Clearing Account number
FFT2 tag
Agent Account tag.
2.
Select one of two modes to calculate unrealized profit: using Best Bid & Best Ask or Last Trade.
Trading Technologies Broker Plug-in
3.
If the account requires enabling multiple gateways feature, check the Use Multiple Exchange Gateway (Tag
18203) box.
Order Settings tab
Time In field.
Select one of 4 available Time In Force order parameters
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
An order specifying that a trade is to be executed at the opening of the market, otherwise it's canceled.
Order is placed and it is active up to a specified date. Once GTD time-in-force parameter is selected, the Good Till
Date field occurs to specify number of days for order to stay active. The inactive field nearby indicates the date.
300
Authority section.
Connectivity section
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
3.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
The Reset button becomes active only when the profile is connected. Click Reset to reset the settings to default.
New settings are applied only when the profile is reconnected.
ZenFire/Rithmic Server Sim Broker Plug-in
302
Authority section
Connectivity section
Make sure that the selected deployment is Zen-Fire Server/Rithmic Sim Do not change anything else in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
3.
It is obligatory to specify an account in Account field to send orders to. Click Lookup button to get list of available
accounts and select one of them.
Select one of the four available Time In Force order parameters.
DAY; or:
Order is canceled if it does not execute by the close of the trading day. Unless otherwise specified, every order is a
Day order.
Specifying that the order must execute immediately and in its entirety, or be canceled.
303
Order will continue to work within the system and in the marketplace until it executes or is canceled.
Any portion of an order that is not filled as soon as it becomes available in the market is canceled.
Backtesting vs Live Trading
304
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click Order and Position Tracker Window; or:
Click on the Order and Position Tracker icon on the Main toolbar.
Accounts Tab
Accounts tab shows the following information:
Account Balance
Equity
Open P/L
Daily P/L
FXCM
Interactive Brokers
Patsystems
Calculated by MultiCharts +
Trading Technologies -
Open E Cry
Zen-Fire
+*
Rithmic
PFG Best
+**
MBTrading
- - not available
305
Orders Tab
Orders tab shows the orders generated by the strategy or created manually.
The following information is available:
Generated shows the time and date when the order was generated;
Filled/Cancelled shows the time when the order was filled or cancelled;
Order Name shows the name of the order that was generated;
Order Type shows the type of the order that was generated;
Order Category shows the category of the order that was generated;
State shows the state of orders (sent, submitted, pre-cancelled, cancelled, partially filled, filled, rejected);
Stop shows the stop price at which the order was placed;
Limit shows the limit price at which the order was placed;
Strategy Name shows the name of the strategy that has generated the order
Workspace shows the name of the workspace where the order was generated
The information in Orders tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument, State and Date (From To).
Order Modification
To cancel the order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and click Cancel Order.
To cancel all active orders for all symbols right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu and click
Cancel All Orders.
To cancel all active orders for the particular symbol right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu and
click Cancel All Orders for This Symbol.
To cancel all active orders and close all open positions right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu
and click Flatten Everything.
To change the price of an active order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and then click Change
Stop Price /Change Limit Price.
To change the size of an active order right-click on the order to see the shortcut menu and then click Change
Order Quantity.
306
Profile where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
Average Price - average price of executed entry orders that have created this position;
Open P/L shows open profit and loss for this position;
The information in Open Positions tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument.
Position Modification
To close a particular position right-click on the position to see the shortcut menu and click Close this Instrument
position at Account #.
To cancel all active orders and close all open positions right-click on one of the orders to see the shortcut menu
and click Flatten Everything.
Broker
Open P/L
FXCM
Interactive Brokers
Calculated by MC
Patsystems
Trading Technologies +
Calculated by MC
MBTrading
Calculated by MC
Open E Cry
Zen-Fire
+*
Rithmic
PFG Best
+**
MBTrading
Calculated by MC
307
Note: only orders that were generated by a strategy are showed in Strategy Positions tab. The orders that were
placed manually or sent from another program are not showed.
After the position is closed the corresponding line in the Strategy Positions tab is removed.
The following information is available:
Broker Position shows a broker position for a particular instrument and account;
Positions Match shows you if the strategy position and position at broker are the same. True (position at
broker matches the strategy position) or False (position at broker does not match the strategy position) status;
Average Price shows the average price of executed entry orders of the strategy at broker;
Resolution shows the resolution of the chart where the strategy is applied;
Strategy Open P/L shows open profit and loss of the strategy;
Profile where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
Strategy Name shows the name of the strategy that has generated this position;
Workspace shows the name of the workspace with the chart where the strategy is applied is situated.
Date/Time shows the date and time when the position was opened;
Profile where you can see the broker profile that is connected;
Average Price - average price of executed entry orders that have created this position;
Open P/L shows open profit and loss for this position;
The information in Positions History tab can be filtered by Profile, Account, Source, Instrument and Date (From To).
Note: We display all updates coming to MultiCharts from your broker. Unfortunately the updates of avg entry
price and current market position come asynchronously from your broker. MultiCharts doesnt filter them,
otherwise it can lose some information. Symbol Mapping can also affect number of the duplicated lines (depends
on the number of lines with same instrument in Symbol Mapping window) in Position History tab.
Logs tab
Logs tab shows the information on the trading events and messages received from broker.
Strategy Name shows the name of the strategy that has generated the order;
308
Message
shows
information
on
connecting/disconnecting
broker
profiles,
placing/cancellation/execution/rejection of orders, warnings from brokers, error messages, and market position
change.
The information in Logs tab can be filtered by Profile, Strategy, Instrument, Category (Information, Warning,
Error) and Date (From To).
Alerts Tab
Alerts tab shows the alerts generated by the scripts.
The following information is available:
Date/Time shows the date and time when the alert was triggered;
The information in Alerts tab can be filtered by Profile and Date (From To).
Managing columns
To show/hide a column, right-click on the column heading and check/ uncheck the column name check boxes.
To move one of the columns drag it to the left or right.
To change the alignment of a column, right-click on the column heading, point to Alignment and select the option
that you need.
To be able to highlight rows by numbers right-click on the column heading and check the Show Row Selector
check box.
To change the column width right-click on the column heading and click Fit to Text.
Currency
To select the currency to display values in the Accounts tab select File in the main menu, click Preferences, select
the Trading tab and select the currency from the Preferred Currency list.
309
Symbol Mapping
Symbol Mapping is a universal symbol name translation tool between data feeds and brokers. Very often data
feeds and brokers have different names for the same symbol and orders can get rejected because of incorrect
symbol reference. Thanks to Symbol Mapping tool it is possible to use any combination of data feeds and brokers.
It helps to route your order to the broker, and to receive order status.
310
311
When you select the Chart Symbol and the Broker Symbol they can have different exchange settings.
In this example, SMART is the exchange where MultiCharts sends orders. The rest of the exchanges are potential
exchanges where the order can be executed. Order statuses are received from one of the exchanges in the Broker
Symbol column.
In the main menu select File, then point to Broker Profiles and click Symbol Mapping
Right-click on one of the Broker Profiles on the Trade Bar to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol
Mapping
Right-click on the DOM at the right or at the left of the price ladder to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol
Mapping
Right-click on the Chart Trading Panel to see the shortcut menu and click Symbol Mapping
Choose the broker profile in the Broker Profile box ( Broker Profiles )
To delete an existing line from the Symbol Mapping window click Remove
Note: Symbol mapping lines can be deleted and will not re-appear if there are no plotted charts, opened DOM
windows with the same symbols, the symbol is not entered in the trade bar and there are no open position on
the symbols at broker end.
312
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Instruments tab, or use the category tabs to list only
a particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by
clicking on the column header. Double-click the symbol, or click OK to select the symbol.
If there is no instrument you are looking for in the list, click the Add button. Insert Symbol Into Portfolio
window will be opened. It is important to add instrument From Data Source with predefined correct settings. If
the data vendor doesn't support wizard for adding symbols, a warning message "Please run QuoteManager to
add the symbol manually." pops up. To find out more about adding instruments, see Adding symbols to database.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Instruments tab, or use the category tabs to list only
a particular category of symbols; the list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by
clicking on the column header. Double-click the symbol, or click OK to select the symbol.
If there is no instrument you are looking for in the list, click the Add button. Insert Symbol Into Portfolio
window will be opened. It is important to add instrument From Data Source with predefined correct settings. If
the data vendor doesn't support wizard for adding symbols, a warning message "Please run QuoteManager to
add the symbol manually." pops up. To find out more about adding instruments, see Adding symbols to database.
Broker Symbol can be configured automatically using the Chart Symbol settings in the Quote Manager by
Note: Automatic configuration should be enough when data feed and broker are the same, but may require
some modification if data source and broker are different. If you use Interactive Brokers, or Trading Technologies
as your broker make sure that you add symbols From Data Source in Quote Manager (see Operating Symbol List).
To save your symbol mapping configuration you should click Apply or OK.
313
Backtesting
Backtesting vs Live Trading
Understanding Backtesting limitations
Backtesting (strategy calculation on historical data) is an essential tool for a certain type of strategies. However, it
has some limitations as every simulator has.
When you are trading live, the market always responds to your actions. Your trades and submitted orders always
have impact regardless of how small your trade size is. The orders that you submit change market depth and you
can see these changes in real-time. This can never be simulated in backtesting as no algorithm is able to recreate
market reaction on market depth change.
Moreover, there is always broker latency (exchange latency, internet connection latency). This latency is a dynamic
constantly changing value. It can be 400 milliseconds in one moment of time and 1 millisecond 10 seconds later.
Consequently, it cannot be compensated in backtesting by setting a fixed latency time (e.g. 400 milliseconds).
It is important to understand that every trading strategy type needs different simulation: scalping strategies require
one simulation type, position trading needs another one etc.
Example: A scalping strategy with average profit per trade = 1 pip (strategy 1) will produce less realistic results in
backtesting than a position strategy with 300 pips average profit per trade (strategy 2) as 1 or 2 pip variations
between backtesting and real trades will make a little impact on strategy 2 while strategy 1 backtesting performance
may be completely different from live trading due to these variations.
Broker latency can be negligible for position trading while it should be taken into consideration when the position
holding time is relatively small.
Example : Strategy 1 average position holding time is 30 minutes. Strategy 2 average position holding time is several
seconds (scalping). In the first case latency factor is negligible, so strategy 1 backtesting results will be more or less
the same as live trading performance. However, in case of strategy 2, broker latency can change live trading
performance dramatically compared to backtesting.
Generally, the higher average profit per position and average position holding time are, the more accurate
backtesting results are.
314
Live Trading
Backtesting
Historical data available for backtesting will, in most cases, be in the form of
time-based bars (minute, daily etc.) based on a group of ticks, with only Open,
High, Low, and Close prices available.
While it is not possible to get information on the actual price movement within
each bar from these four values, in MultiCharts Backtesting accuracy is improved
by incorporating Intra-bar Price Movement Assumptions logic.
A single tick difference between real-time and historical backfilled data can
generate completely different looking charts. This in turn would impact the
calculations of your strategy.
Backtesting Options
Backtesting provides you with a general idea of how your strategy can behave. This information is not to be solely
relied on for making decisions. The features to bring your Backtesting results closer to the real-time strategy
behavior are:
Precise Backtesting
Intra-Bar Order Generation
Bar Magnifier
Note: Different backtesting and strategy calculation methods can be selected which will produce different results.
Backtesting, optimization, and forward testing (real-time simulation) provide an insight into potential performance
of your strategy in ideal world. This information should be analyzed to get a range of possible scenarios. It is up to
trader to decide if this range is acceptable for live trading or not.
Bar Magnifier
The Bar Magnifier backtest feature is important for precise backtesting. Bar magnifier can be considered as a
replay of the way a bar was formed. The user can choose a replay frequency that is based on number of ticks or
number of minutes.
There is a tradeoff between the level of precision in a replay and memory requirements. Tick-by-tick replay is the
most precise, but it also requires the most memory. If the strategy does not require high precision, then replays
based on n-ticks or n-minutes may be sufficient.
315
For example, Bar Magnifier is helpful when both the profit target and stop loss occurred on the same bar. In this
situation, it is unclear whether the profit target or the stop loss occurred first. With Bar Magnifier, MultiCharts is
able to see how the bar was formed to determine whether the profit target or the stop loss occurred first.
Note: We suggest to use tick because most precise To use the feature:
1.
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
a Hand
changes into
2.
3.
2.
3. In the Backtesting Precision section, select the Use Bar Magnifier checkbox.
Bar Magnifier
4.
MultiCharts will break down each bar into a series of lower resolution bars so that it can look to see how the
Select the Tick radio button if the chart has tick-based resolution. Enter the number of ticks for the lower
resolution bars. The number of ticks must be at a lower resolution than the chart resolution, or
Select the Intra-day radio button if the chart has minute resolution or daily resolution. Enter the number of
minutes for the lower resolution bars. The number of minutes must be at a lower resolution than the resolution of
the chart, or
Select the Daily radio button if the chart has weekly resolution or higher. MultiCharts will break down each bar
Check the Skip ticks with identical prices checkbox for faster backtesting. MultiCharts will skip ticks with
Check the Enable access to intra-bar time for calculation in Intra-Bar Order Generation mode checkbox to
make intra-bar time available from PowerLanguage script (Date, Time and Time_s keywords).
Note: If a strategy is based volume, then selecting this box may disrupt the volume calculations.
While it is not possible from these four values to infer the actual price movement within each bar, the Backtesting
Engine improves the backtesting accuracy by incorporating intra-bar price movement assumption logic:
1.
An order could be executed at every valid price level throughout the entire range of the bar.
2.
If the opening price is closer to the high of the bar than to the low, the intra-bar price movement is assumed
If the opening price is closer to the low of the bar than to the high, or if the opening price is exactly in between
the high and the low of the bar, the intra-bar price movement is assumed to be in the order of Open-Low-HighClose.
The first assumption implies that a Stop or a Limit order will execute at the Stop or the Limit price.
The second and third assumptions are significant when there are multiple orders active at the same time. If both a
Stop Loss and a Profit Target prices are reached within the same bar, the order of price movement within the bar
will determine which one of these orders will be executed.
For example, with a Stop Loss at 1340
In a bar with an Open of 1355, a High of 1360, a Low of 1340, and a Close of 1345, the Profit Target will be
In a bar with an Open of 1345, a High of 1360, a Low of 1340, and a Close of 1355, the Stop Loss will be assumed
Either with all prices between Open, High, Low, Close of a bar, assuming that all these prices are real;
Or with specific prices only, when 1 tick resolution is chosen or Bar Magnifier is used.
Limit order execution behavior for backtesting can be modified in the Backtesting tab of Strategy Properties
window.
There are 4 different variants:
1.
Chart resolution is 1 tick or Bar Magnifier of any resolution is enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill
limit order when trade takes place at limit price or better.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121;
available prices: 120, 122, 125, ...; order is filled @ 122.
317
2.
Chart resolution is 1 tick or Bar Magnifier of any resolution is enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill
limit order when trade price goes beyond limit price by 3 points.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121
; available prices: 120, 122, 125, ...; order is filled @ 125.
1.
Chart resolution is not 1 tick and Bar Magnifier is not enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill limit
order when trade takes place at limit price or better.Example: Generated order: sellshort limit @ 121; order is
filled @ 121 or better if 121 (or better) is between High and Low of the bar.
2.
Chart resolution is not 1 tick and Bar Magnifier is not enabled. Backtesting Assumptions is set to Fill limit
Order Linking
Strategy signals are visually shown on the chart using arrows. If a strategy uses several different entry signals, then
it can be difficult to see clearly which entry signal was exited.
Order Linking draws a line from the entry signal to the exit signal so that it is possible to visually match an entry
signal with its exit signal.
Order linking also makes it clear which trades are profitable or not profitable on the chart.
The lines are color coded. The default colors for the lines are as follows:
Green: profitable trade
Red: unprofitable trade
To change the settings:
1.
Open the Format Signal window.To open the Format Signal window, position the mouse pointer over one of
; in the Format
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button.
The Format Signal window can also be opened by one of the following methods: Position the mouse pointer over one of the signal's Arrows, Ticks, or Labels;
once the Pointer
Objects window that appears, select a signal and click the Format button
- Open the Format Objects window; in the Signals tab, select a signal and click the Format button.
Note: The Format Signal window for the signal being inserted will open automatically if the Format check box in the
Insert Study window is checked.
2.
3.
Select the strategy and select the Format button. A window to format the strategy will appear.
4.
5.
Check the Show Connecting Line checkbox to show the connecting lines.
6.
In the drop-down lists, select the setting for the Line Style, Line Weight, Profitable Line Color, and Unprofitable
Line Color.
7.
Precise Backtesting
Understanding Precise Backtesting
Depending on the strategy, Precise Strategy Back Testing can give the user a more realistic emulation during back
testing. To back test high frequency strategies like statistical arbitrage, the user may need take into account the
historical bid/ask data in addition to the historical trade data.
With Precise Back Testing, the user can load the historical bid data series and the historical ask data series into
MultiCharts. MultiCharts will use the ask data series to fill buy market orders and buy stop orders. Similarly,
MultiCharts will use the bid data series to fill sell market orders and sell stop orders.
Consider a situation where a market order to buy 1 contract and a market order to sell 1 contract are submitted at
the same time at the close of a bar. If the user only uses the trade data series, then there is only one price for the
close. The back test will show that these two orders were filled at the same price, and the profit/loss is zero. In
reality, there's a bid/ask spread. If the price quote doesnt move suddenly, then these two orders will undoubtedly
generate an instantaneous loss due to the bid/ask spread. That's why its more precise to back test with a bid data
series and an ask data series.
Consider another situation where the trade price doesn't occur on either the bid or the ask. Due to liquidity or other
reasons, the historical data series may show that the trade price was either in between or outside the bid/ask. In
this situation, the user may want to be conservative and assume fills at the bid/ask instead of at the trade price.
Consider a third situation where there is sufficient liquidity and the trades do occur on the bid/ask. The strategy uses
10 minute bars. The strategy buys 1 contract at 10:00am and exits the position at 11:00am. The PowerLanguage
code for such a strategy is as follows:
If Time=1000 Then Buy 1 Contract This Bar on Close;
<br>If Time=1100 Then Sell 1 Contract This Bar on Close;
If this strategy was back tested on simply a data series of historical trade prices, then the back test will assume that
the trades were filled at the close prices of the bars. However, it's unclear whether the trades would have been filled
at the close prices, because the close prices could have been on either the bid or the ask.
If the close price was an ask price and the strategy was buying, then the fill price was realistic. However, if the close
price was a bid price and the strategy was buying, then the fill price was unrealistic.
If the close price was a bid price and the strategy was selling, then the fill price was realistic. However, if the close
price was an ask price and the strategy was selling, then the fill price was unrealistic.
With Precise Back Testing, users can load two separate data series onto the chart. The first data series is for historical
bid prices. The second data series is for historical ask prices. MultiCharts will use these two data series to determine
realistic fill prices. The bar's close will have a bid and an ask price associated with it. MultiCharts will use the ask
price to fill a market buy order and the bid price to fill a market sell order.
Make sure the symbol contains historical bid and ask data.
2.
3.
1.
Open the Format Instrument window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
Select OK.
4.
Add the same symbol into the same chart window. The chart window now has two charts.
5.
Designate this chart (the second chart) as the Bid data series:
1.
Open the Format Instrument window.To open the Format Instruments window, click the Format Instruments
icon on the main toolbar; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol and click the Format button.
The Format Instruments window can also be opened by one of the following methods:
-
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; double-click once the Pointer
Hand
-
changes into a
Position the mouse pointer over the symbol's data series; once the Pointer
right-
Right-click on an empty area of the chart and then click Format Instruments; if the Format Objects window
Select Format in the main menu and click Instrument; if the Format Objects window appears, select the symbol
3.
4.
Select OK.
6.
Apply the strategy to the Ask data series, which is the first chart. It does not matter if the strategy is applied to
the Ask data series or the Bid data series. It only matters that the strategy is applied to the first chart.
1.
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
changes
320
into a Hand
2.
3.
2.
3.
Select the Extended. The strategy backtesting engine emulation based on bid & ask series data radio button.
4.
In Use for ask series data, select the ask series data.
5.
In Use for bid series data, select the bid series data.
6.
Click OK.
Understanding Backtesting
A strategy is a set of Signals applied to a chart. Each signal is a mechanical technical analysis tool, used to
systematically specify market entry or exit points according to a set of trading rules implemented in the signal's
algorithm.
Note: A strategy has separate Properties, separate from signals' settings.
Once a strategy is applied to a chart, the backtesting process starts. During the backtesting process, the strategy
places trades where they would have occurred the past, according to the set of rules applied. The trades are placed
throughout the entire available period of historical data. If strategy is applied to real-time chart, the strategy
continues to place new trades as the real-time data is received.
A Performance Report can be generated, based on the trades placed by the strategy and containing statistics and
performance measurements.
Note: New trades, placed by the strategy after the performance report has already been generated, will not be
added to the performance report in real time. To incorporate the new trades into the performance report should
be generated again.
321
cases it may be possible that both the entry and the exit orders will be executed based on the same tick. For a
detailed description see Order Execution Priority
2.
In the main menu select View then click Strategy Performance Report.
2.
3.
to review.
322
2.
In the right side move cursor on a performance index required. The cursor will change into Description
In the lower right panel a text description will appear. Click Close
4.
Use Back
and Forward
2.
Click Zoom In
or Zoom Out
to review.
Zooming
3.
Use Pan
or Cross
4.
Use Back
cursor modes for moving charts or precise reviewing chart values respectively.
and Forward
toolbar button.
2.
3.
Set appropriate properties or click Default to set back to the default settings.
More Information:
Point value review Big Point Value definition.
Initial capital - Initial capital to start strategy performance calculations with.
Commission - the amount supposed to be paid to broker for trades execution. The commission can be set on "per
contract" or on "per trade" basis.
323
With Per Contract option, the Commission value is multiplied for the each trade by the double number of contracts
in the trade (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
With Per Trade option, the Commission value value is multiplied for each trade by the 2 (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
The default Commission value is zero.
Slippage - the amount reserved for differencies between the expected and actual order execution price. The
commission can be set on "per contract" or on "per trade" basis.
With Per Contract option, the Slippage value is multiplied for the each trade by the double number of contracts in
the trade (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
With Per Trade option, the Slippage value is multiplied for each trade by the 2 (i.e. for Entry and Exit).
The default Slippage value is zero.
Margin per contract - the amount to be borrowed when trading on a margin account. This number is used in some
report indices calculation.
Interest rate - the rate used in some report indices calculation. Usually the Treasury Bill rate is used.
No. of standard deviations the number of standard deviations is used in some report indices calculation. The
default is 1.
Minimal acceptable rate of return reference point for Sortino Ratio (See "Performance Ratios" section in the
Performance report)
Degree of risk aversion of the investor - reference point for Fouse Ratio (See "Performance Ratios" section in the
Performance report)
4. Click OK.
toolbar button.
2.
3.
Select USD to display the report in U.S. dollars or select Regional Currency to display the report in another
currency. If Regional Currency is selected, enter the exchange rate in the USD/$ rate textbox.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Enable Strategy Performance Report Chart Synchronization check box to visually match the trades
Select the Entry-based radio button to match the trade in the performance report to its entry signal in the
chart.
Select the Exit-based radio button to match the trade in the performance report to its exit signal in the chart.
2.
3.
Hover the mouse pointer over any trade on the list. The trade on the list will be matched with the signal for
this trade in the chart. The signal on the chart will be highlighted.
324
2.
Select Recalculate the Report on each new order checkbox to update the Strategy Performance Report in
real-time with each new trade. If a new trade is made while the Strategy Performance Report is open, the Strategy
Performance Report will be updated immediately with the new trade.
If this checkbox is unchecked, then the Strategy Performance Report will be updated with the new trade only after
closing and reopening the Strategy Performance Report.
3.
Click OK.
toolbar button.
2.
In the Save As dialog window appeared navigate to the required file location.
3.
4.
In the Type field select the file type. There are 2 types available: *.XLS (MS Excel) and *.XML (XML RINA).
5.
Click Save.
Attention: To save data in an .XLS format a full version of Microsoft Excel must be installed on the computer. Once
saved the .XLS file may be read by any Excel compatible application.
Note: In the *.XLS file the entire report will be saved (including charts).
In the left panel of the Strategy Performance Report select a section or a chart to be printed.
2.
Click Print
3.
4.
Click OK.
toolbar button.
or
1.
In the left panel of the Strategy Performance Report select a section or a chart to be printed.
2.
3.
4.
Click Print
5.
325
Optimization
Performing Optimization
Once a strategy has been applied to a chart, strategy optimization can be performed.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
2.
3.
4.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Exhaustive Search.
5.
In the Exhaustive Search Properties window that opens, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
6.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
7.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
8.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
9.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
10. In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
11. The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
12. Select the Optimization Criteria tab.
13. Select the Use Limitation checkbox to limit the output to a defined number of the best results; unselect the
checkbox to list all the results in the optimization report.
14. When Use Limitation checkbox is checked Optimization dialog window shows current best results for selected
riteria during optimization.
15. Enter the desired number of best results in the Show N best results box.
16. Select the best results criteria in the best results for list box.
17. Select criteria:
326
1.
2.
Select the criteria from the drop-down list. Read more about Standard Criteria. or:
1.
2.
3.
Write the script for the custom criteria. Read more about Custom Criteria.
4.
Click OK.
18. Select Ascending or Descending option to sort the output in ascending or descending order, respectively.
19. Click OK to run the optimization and generate the Optimization Report.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
2.
3.
4.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Genetic Algorithm.
5.
In the Genetic Algorithm Properties window that opens, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
6.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
7.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
8.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
9.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
10. In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
11. The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
12. Select the Algorithm-specific Properties tab.
13. Select criteria:
1.
2.
Select the criteria from the drop-down list. Read more about Standard Criteria. or:
1.
2.
3.
Write the script for the custom criteria. Read more about Custom Criteria.
327
4.
Click OK.
14. Select Ascending or Descending option to sort the output in ascending or descending order, respectively.
15. An optimum population size value is automatically placed into the Population Size box; if a different value is
desired, enter the value into the box.
16. In the Crossover Probability box, enter the desired crossover probability; value range is 0.95-0.99, with a
default of 0.95.
17. In the Mutation Probability box, enter the desired mutation probability; value range is 0.01-0.05, with a default
of 0.05.
18. In the Convergence Type drop-down list, select Number of Generations or Proximal Convergence.
19. In the Maximum Number of Generations box, enter the desired maximum number of generations.
20. If Proximal Convergence was selected, enter the desired minimum number of generations and convergence
rate into the respective boxes. A value, approaching 1 is usually selected for the convergence rate; the default value
is
0.990000.
21. In the Genetic Algorithm Subtype drop-down list, select Basic or Incremental algorithm subtype.
22. If Basic algorithm subtype was selected, select Yes or No for Use Elitism option.
23. If Incremental algorithm subtype was selected, select the Replacement Scheme and Offspring Number
(number of children).
24. Click OK to run the optimization and generate the Optimization Report.
25. Optimization dialogue window shows Average fitness value for current population during optimization.
Standard Criteria
Standard Criteria lets the user select a criterion from a pre-defined list.
For example, if the user selects Net Profit, the optimization will find the parameters that generate the highest Net
Profit.
Custom Criteria
Custom Criteria lets the user create his own criteria. Instead of choosing from a pre-defined list like in Standard
Criteria, the user can script his own criteria. E.g., suppose the user wants to find the parameters that maximize the
Net Profit / Max Drawdown ratio. This ratio isn't pre-defined under Standard Criteria, so it won't be in the dropdown list. However, this ratio can be created using Custom Criteria.
It is also possible to add additional criteria such as number of trades and winning percentage.
E.g., it is possible to specify: the result have more than 300 trades and a winning percentage that's greater than
50%.
The scripting language is JavaScript.
Code Example
The code below creates the Net Profit / Max Drawdown ratio:
if (StrategyPerformance.MaxStrategyDrawDown != 0)
return StrategyPerformance.NetProfit / (-
StrategyPerformance.MaxStrategyDrawDown);
328
Besides NetProfit and MaxStrategyDrawdown, there are many other properties that can be referenced. The table
below shows the available properties.
For example, to reference the number of trades, simply use StrategyPerformance.TotalTrades. To reference winning
percentage, simply use StrategyPerformance.PercentProfitable.
Name of property in the object
Description
Available in MultiCharts
StrategyPerformance
Available in Portfolio
Optimization
NetProfit
Net Profit
Yes
Yes
GrossProfit
Gross Profit
Yes
Yes
Gross Loss
Gross Loss
Yes
Yes
TotalTrades
Total Trades
Yes
Yes
Percent Profitable
% Profitable
Yes
Yes
Winning Trades
Winning Trades
Yes
Yes
LosingTrades
Losing Trades
Yes
Yes
AvgTrade
Avg Trade
Yes
No
AvgWinningTrade
Yes
No
AvgLosingTrade
Yes
No
WinLossRatio
Win/Loss Ratio
Yes
No
MaxConsecWinners
Max Consecutive
Yes
No
Winners
MaxConsecLosers
Yes
No
AvgBarsInWinningTrades
Yes
No
AvgBarsInLosingTrades
Yes
No
MaxStrategyDrawDown
Max Intraday
Drawdown
Yes
Yes
ProfitFactor
Profit Factor
Yes
No
ReturnOnAccount
Return on Account
Yes
No
Understanding Optimization
A strategy is created by implementing trading concepts, ideas, and observations of historical market behavior, into
a trading system. The very idea of a trading system implies a degree of optimization to market behavior.
The process of strategy optimization further enhances and automates this process. Strategy optimization is the
search for the set of optimum parameters for the defined criteria. By testing a range of signal input values,
optimization aids in selecting the values that correspond, based on historical data, to the best strategy performance.
Optimization aids in better understanding of strategy's characteristics and in creating new criteria for entries and
exits.
329
Different traders use different criteria to define strategy performance. Some traders use the highest net profit, while
other traders use the lowest drawdown. MultiCharts lets the trader define his own criteria.
Optimization can have detrimental effects if the user searches for the combination of inputs based solely on the
best performance over a period of historical data and focuses to much on market conditions that may never occur
again. This approach is known as over-optimization or curve-fitting. Performance will not be the same in real trading,
since historical patterns are highly unlikely to be repeated.
Optimization Methods
There are two optimization methods: Exhaustive Search and Genetic Algorithm.
Crossover - a procedure for generating a child from two parent genomes. Crossover involves multiple genomes.
Mutation - a process when a gene is changed and receives a value that is neither from the "mother" or the "father".
Mutation involves only a single genome each time.
Generation (Population) - a group of individuals (genomes), all born at about the same time.
Convergence - the extent of improvement in the average fitness between two consecutive generations; as the
degree of improvement is decreasing, the generations are said to be converging.
In brief, the optimization process works as follows:
The fittest members are retained, and the least fit members gradually discarded.
A new population of individuals is generated from the remaining members of the previous population by
applying the crossover and mutation operations, as well as selection and/or replacement strategies (built into the
GA).
The fitness of these new individuals is evaluated, the fittest members retained, and the least fit members
gradually discarded
The process is repeated, until the specified degree of convergence or generation number is reached (depends
on GA setting selected).
After a number of all possible combinations is determined, an optimal number of individuals is selected.
2.
Each individual is selected at random. These individuals form the first Generation. The optimal number of
individuals is automatically placed in Population Size field and can be changed manually.Tip: An excessively large
Population Size value will result in an increase in calculation time, while an overly small Population Size value will
result in a decrease in calculation accuracy.
Note: MultiCharts' GA support artificially exclusive population. This means that identical individuals cannot exist
inside the same population, and thus the population size can not exceed the total number of input combinations.
The population size is constant for each generation.
3.
The fitness of each individual is evaluated and the least fit individuals discarded.
4.
A new population of individuals is generated from the remaining members of the previous population by
applying the crossover and mutation operations, as well as selection and/or replacement strategies that depend
on the GA subtype:
Crossover and Mutation
MultiCharts uses the so-called Array Uniform Crossover. With this Crossover type, each of the childs genes can come
from each of the parents with equal probability.
In the Crossover Probability field, the probability of a crossover for each individual is specified; the usual value range
is 0.95-0.99, with the default value of 0.95.
MultiCharts uses the so-called Random Flip Mutation. With this Mutation type, each gene can be replaced with any
other possible gene on random basis.
In the Mutation Probability field, the probability of a mutation for each individual is specified; the usual value range
is 0.01-0.05, with the default value of 0.05.
Tip: An excessively large Mutation Probability value will cause the search to become a primitive random search.
331
The fitness of each individual is evaluated and the least fit individuals discarded.
6.
The process is repeated, until the specified degree of convergence or generation number is reached (depends
on GA setting selected).
GA Convergence Type
Genetic Algorithms optimization process has no implicit final result and thus can proceed forever. Therefore, an
"ending-point" must be specified, indicating when the optimization process must come to an end.
Two GA optimization "ending-point" criteria types can be selected: Terminate-Upon-Generation and TerminateUpon-Convergence.
Terminate-Upon-Generation will stop the optimization process once the specified Maximum Number of
Generations is reached.
Terminate-Upon-Convergence will stop the optimization process once the defined Convergence Rate is reached, or
once the defined Maximum Number of Generations is reached.
GA optimization "ending-point" criterion is selected in the Conversion Type drop-down list.
The desired Maximum Number of Generations, Minimum Number of Generations, and Conversion Rate can be set
in the corresponding text boxes.
332
Convergence Rate
Convergence Rate of generations is the ratio between the Convergence value of the two most recent generations
and the Convergence value of the current generation and the generation N generations ago.
GA calculation is stopped after meeting [x N] / C [x] >= P condition where : x
ordinal number of the current generation;
[x] convergence value of the two most recent generations;
N defined minimal number of the generations;
P - convergence rate; values used are usually close to 1, with the default value of 0.99.
Note: Convergence Rate is not calculated for generations that have an ordinal number less than the defined minimal
number of the generations.
Further Reading
This is only a brief introduction to genetic algorithms. We recommend that you learn more about GA on the Internet,
e.g. Wikipedia .
2.
Run an optimization.
3.
Winning Trades
Losing Trades
Avg Trade
Avg Winning Trade
Avg Losing Trade
Win/Loss ratio
Max Consecutive Wins
Max Consecutive Losses
Avg # of Bars in Winners
Avg # of Bars in Losers
Maximum Intraday Drawdown
Profit Factor
Return on Account
Input Values
Note: The performance indices are identical to those in the Performance Report.
Using Optimization Report
In the Optimization Report set the criterion and sorting order from the Sort by drop-down list.
2.
3.
2.
Note: Store Optimization Report option may consume considerable amount of resources and is disabled by default.
334
2.
In the Save As dialog window appeared navigate to the required file location.
3.
4.
Click Save.
Note: The entire report information will be saved to the file.
1-70
Segment
2
OOS
71-100
100
31-100
101130
100
Segment
3
61-130
131160
100
Segment
4
91-160
161190
100
Segment
5
121190
191220
100
335
Step 1: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 1's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 1's OOS data.
Step 2: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 2's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 2's OOS data.
Step 3: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 3's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 3's OOS data.
Step 4: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 4's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 4's OOS data.
Step 5: Parameter optimization is performed using Segment 5's IS data. These parameters are then used to back test
the strategy on Segment 5's OOS data. The walk forward optimization is complete.
There are OOS performance results for bars 71-220. Walk Forward Optimization considers the OOS performance
results "real" instead of "curve-fit" because the parameters that produced the OOS results were generated from IS
data.
As shown, the starting point of each subsequent segment begins 30 bars after the starting point of the previous
segment. The starting point of each segment steps forward. Hence, this type of walk forward optimization is said to
be not anchored. The reason the step is 30 bars is because that's the length of the OOS portion.
Walk Forward Optimization
Note: The significance of OOS results from Walk Forward Optimization is debatable. For more information, please
see additional literature about this subject.
OOS
Segment
1
1-70
71-100
100
Segment
2
1100
101130
130
Segment
3
1130
131160
160
Segment
4
1160
161190
190
Segment
5
1190
191220
220
336
The rest of the anchored walk forward optimization process is the same as not-anchored walk forward optimization.
Open the Format Objects window.To open the Format Objects window, right-click on an empty area of the
Position the mouse pointer over any one of the signal's labels on the chart; once the Pointer
Hand
changes into
2.
Select the Signals tab and select the signal in the box.
3.
Click the Optimize button. The Select Optimization Method box will appear.
4.
Select either Exhaustive or Genetic radio button for the type of optimization. (Both will work with Walk
Forward Optimization.)
5.
6.
Enter the number of bars/days for the IS portion of a segment into the IS textbox.
7.
Enter the number of bars/days for the OOS portion of a segment into the OOS textbox.
8.
Check the Anchored checkbox to use anchoring. Uncheck the Anchored checkbox to not use anchoring.
9.
10. Select the Optimizable Inputs tab. Input start and end values for the inputs.
11. If performing an Exhaustive optimization, select the Optimization Criteria tab and complete inputs.
If performing a Genetic optimization, select the Algorithm-specific Properties tab and complete inputs. For
more information, see Performing Optimization
12. Click the OK button.
337
Data Playback
Understanding Data Playback
Data Playback is a useful tool for traders wishing to stream data step-by-step data backward and forward in order
to see how their strategy would behave in real-time. It allows playback of market data with the specified speed and
resolution.
Playback in MultiCharts has a number of distinctive features making it a unique simulation tool:
Jump to Bar Mode allowing you to set the start point with just one click.
Possibility to choose Playback Resolution: tick by tick, second by second, minute by minute etc.
Flexible Playback Speed: per bar (as is) or x updates per second.
Step Backward/Forward allowing you to move forward or backward on the time scale without losing
indicators/signals values.
Set the date and time in the Playback Start Date/Time box
button
2.
Set the Playback Resolution (As is bar per bar, tick by tick etc.) by one of the following methods:
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback, Playback Resolution and select the resolution.
3.
4.
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback and choose Go To Realtime
Note: If you try to place a manual order during data playback when a broker profile is connected, the order will be
sent to the broker with the current market price. That is not possible to place simulated orders during the data
playback for testing purposes. All orders are sent to the currently connected broker.
338
To set starting time and date, input the necessary date and time into Playback Start
Date/Time box
and click the Jump To Date button DP_jump_to_time_btn on the Data
Playback toolbar. When the starting point is set, the playback is set to Pause mode by default.
Note: Not all Data Playback resolutions are available for market scanner (See Data Playback Limitations)
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback, point to Step Forward/ Step Backward and
In the main menu select Format, then point to Data Playback and click Global mode in the list.
Second by Second
Minute by Minute;
Hour by Hour;
339
Day by Day.
Note: If the playback resolution is lower than the resolution of the data series on the chart, additional detailed data
will be downloaded from the data source. In this case status line indicates Waiting for Detailed Data.
Data series, indicators and strategies markers will disappear at the right side of the playback starting point. They will
appear once Data Playback starts.
All the drawings remain in their original place. They can disappear when the starting point is set. When the playback
reaches the place where the drawing was put, the drawing appears.
If a study require more data for calculation than there are at the starting point, the calculation will start when the
playback reaches the required bars number.
The real-time data is downloaded and collected while Data Playback is active.
When the playback reaches its end, real-time data is displayed on the chart
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcuts allow configuring custom key combinations to execute frequently used commands.
2.
3.
4.
Press desired key combination. If this combination is already in use the associated command will be displayed
Click Assign.
6.
Click OK.
Custom Commands
Trading.Custom category allows to create custom orders and assign custom key combinations to them.
Click <<Click for New Custom Order>> to setup a custom order, click OK and follow the steps to edit a Keyboard
Shortcut.
Charting.Custom and Scanner.Custom categories allow to assign custom key combinations to a particular study
applied to a chart or scanner window.
Click <<Click for New CustInsert Study>> to select a study, click OK and follow the steps to edit a Keyboard Shortcut.
Note: Custom key combinations should consist of Shift and/or Ctrl and/or Alt key plus a letter key, a number key or
a function key (F1, F2 etc.) Other keys that can be used are: Insert, Home, Page Up, Delete, End, Page Down and
function keys (F1, F2 etc.).
340
Order Confirmation
To enable/disable order confirmation window for orders placed/cancelled using Keyboard Shortcuts select File in
the main menu, click Preferences, select the Trading tab and check/uncheck the Show order confirmation dialog
when placing/cancelling orders using keyboard shortcuts check box.
341
Monitor real-time market data in different resolutions (ticks, minutes, days, etc)
Plot studies that are either newly built or imported from other sources Scanner features:
Ability to mix different data feeds within the same Scanner window
Ability to create a chart directly from the Scanner with a mouse click
2.
Select File in the main menu, then point to New and click on New Scanner Window, or
3.
4.
Right-click on the empty area of the workspace and select Scanner Window.
You can copy a symbol or symbols from the Real-Time Market Scanner or from some other source and then paste it
into the Real-Time Market Scanner.
To copy and paste symbols within the Real-Time Market Scanner:
1.
Highlight a symbol or symbols that you need with the help of CTRL or/and SHIFT buttons on your keyboard
2.
Right click on the highlighted space and select Copy from the dropbox below, or
3.
4.
Right click on the cell where you want to paste it and select Paste from the dropbox below, or
5.
Right click on the cell in the Real-Time Market Scanner where you want to create it
2.
3.
4.
Select Group, or
5.
To rename Group:
1.
2.
Select Rename
3.
4.
Click Enter.
2.
Select Toggle, or
3.
Click on + / -.
343
2.
Use the scroll bars located at the bottom and the right side of the Scanner window for viewing the cells that
Arrow Keys - moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow key
END returns the active cell position to the end of the row
page down
CTRL+HOME returns the active cell position to the top left corner
CTRL+END returns the active cell position to the bottom right corner
F7 Insert Study
Move a mouse pointer to the right border of a column header (e.g. Study title or Plot title).
2.
Double click when the pointer shape is changed to Horizontal Resize http:// www. multicharts. com/ img/wiki/
Right-click on the symbol name and select Create Chart. A chart will be plotted in a new chart window.
or:
Double-click on the symbol's Trend cell. A chart will be plotted in a new chart window.
Note: Indicators from the scanner will be applied to the new chart automatically.
2.
2.
Select Themes and check the Invert Default Colors check box.
Adding Studies
1.
Right-click on any cell in the Scanner window and select Insert Study.
2.
Select either an individual study or multiple studies. To select multiple studies, hold down the CTRL button and
Formatting Studies
To format a study:
Right-click on the symbol's cell in the study's column. Select Format Study.
The Format Study dialog window will appear. If a study has two or more plots, then formatting will be applied to all
the plots for that particular study.
345
Select Same as Symbol radio button to use the same number of decimals as the symbol, or
To recalculate study on every tick, select the Update On Every Tick check box.
Note: Even with this check box checked, updates are still limited to two updates in one second.
Note: If the Use as Default check box is selected, then the current Properties settings will be used for every newly
added symbol.
2.
In the Alert Conditions Check section, select whether the alerts will be triggered On Bar Close or Every Tick.
Audio Alert
To enable Audio alerts,
1.
2. Select the Beep radio button for a standard beep sound, or select the Sound radio button to play a custom
sound.
If Sound is selected, select the .wav sound file.
3.
4.
Select Play Once to play selected sound once or Repeat to play it continuously.
Note: The computer must be equipped with a Sound Card to support the Audio Alert function.
Visual Alert
To enable Visual alert:
1.
2. In the Display Notify Window for drop-down list, select the period of time for the alert message to be
displayed.
To enable E-mail alert:
1.
In the E-mail Alert section, select the E-mail Alert check box.
2.
Press the Settings button to access to the E-mail Alert settings window.
3.
4.
Enter the email address of the recipient. To send the email to multiple recipients, separate each email address
with a semi-colon.
5.
Enter the SMTP Server Name or IP address, and Port number into the textboxes. Please get this information
346
6.
Check the SMTP Server authentication data checkbox if your SMTP server requires authentication to send
emails. (Usually, if your email account requires a login and password, you need to check this box.) 7. Enter the User
name and Password. (This is usually your email login and password.)
8. Press the Test button to send a test email.
If the sending process has been successful a message will appear in the pop-up window:
2.
3.
2.
Select Format 'Study Title' Study for All Symbols. The Format Study window will appear.
The settings for all existing studies will be changed. However newly added symbols will not inherit these settings.
Learn more about Formatting Studies.
Removing Studies
To remove a study:
1.
Right-click on any cell within the Study's column, excluding the header.
347
2.
Accessing Scripts
To access a script from a Scanner window:
1.
Right-click on any cell within the Study's column, excluding the header.
2.
Select Open 'Study Title' Script. A PowerLanguage Editor window will appear.
3.
Adding a Symbol
To add a new symbol to the Scanner window:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The text is used to filter available symbols. If there is text, then only symbols that contain the text will be available.
Learn more about Adding Symbols to QuoteManager Symbol List
5.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in All Symbols tab.
Tip: Use the category tabs to list only a particular category of symbols.
Tip: The list can be sorted by any column. To sort, click on the column header.
It is also possible to add multiple symbols at the same time. To highlight multiple symbols use one of the following
methods:
Click on the symbol to begin with and while holding SHIFT key click on the last necessary symbol. All symbols
Use CTRL in combination with the mouse to select/deselect symbols one by one. While holding CTRL, a single
click will select the symbol and second click on the same symbol will deselect it; or:
While holding SHIFT use the UP ARROW and the DOWN ARROW keys to select a group of neighbor symbols;
or:
348
While holding CTRL, use the UP ARROW and the DOWN ARROW keys in combination with the SPACE key to
select symbols.
6.
Formatting Symbols
To format a symbol in the Scanner window:
1.
Access the Format Instruments dialog window using one of the following methods:
Select Scanner in the main menu and click on Format Instruments, or:
2.
Symbols
Chart Resolution
Quote Field
Sessions
Build Volume On
Time Zone
Fractional Price Scale Format for Symbols
3.
1.
Select the Use Custom Data Range check box to set the number of bars/days back for indicators applied to this
symbol. Clear the check box to use the default bars/days back.
2.
Enter a number in the text box (from 1 to 100000) and select either Bars Back or Days Back in the drop-down
list.
3.
Select the most recent date from which to calculate Bars Back or Days Back range.
Note: By default, current date is set for the initial value.
4.
Click OK.
2.
3.
To change the custom data range for all the symbols at the same time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter a number in the text box (from 1 to 100000) and select either Bars Back or Days Back in the drop-down
list.
5.
Select the most recent date from which to calculate Bars Back or Days Back range.
Removing a Symbol
To remove a symbol from the Scanner use one of the following methods:
or
2.
3.
Sorting Symbols
Sorting makes it possible to quickly locate and monitor best trading opportunities defined by customizable criteria.
The market data lines in the Scanner can be sorted based on any column.
To sort based on a single criterion:
Double-click on the column header. The market data lines will be sorted based on ascending or descending order.
Tip: Double-click on the same header will switch from the ascending to the descending order of sorting.
To sort based on multiple criteria (up to three),
1.
Right-click on any market data line and select Sort. The Sorting Settings window will appear.
2.
Select the first criteria to sort by using the Sort by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
Select the second criteria to sort by using the Then by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
Select the third criteria to sort by using the Then by drop-down list. Then press the Ascending/Descending
350
Linking Symbols
Symbols in the Scanner can be linked to a chart plot. After linking, the selected symbol in the Scanner can be easily
plotted by simply clicking on the symbol in the Scanner. The symbol will plot automatically in the chart.
To link a Scanner symbol to a chart plot:
1.
2.
3.
5. In the Scanner window select a cell that contains a symbol's ticker. The chart for the symbol will be plotted in
the Chart window.
Note: The symbol name is linked to the Chart window. The other settings, such as Resolution of the Chart, Quote
field, Time Zone, Build Volume on, and Sessions will not be affected.
To unlink a chart from the scanner:
Click the Instrument Link
Note: All studies or signals previously applied to the chart will be recalculated after linking.
Note: All manually placed drawings will stay in their original locations.
Note: Objects based on formula calculations (e.g., signal arrows, etc.) may disappear if the formula calculation on
the new data series does not generate an object.
351
In the main menu select File, then point to New and click Time& Sales Window.
352
Selecting Instrument
To select the instrument you want to trade with:
Type the symbol name into the Instrument Selector field and press Enter; or:
Link button on the Instrument Selector of the Time & Sales Window
and select desired linking color;
2.
3.
Formatting Columns
To adjust columns that are to be indicated on Time & Sales Window:
1.
2.
Or:
1.
2.
2.
Left
Center
Right
2.
Select Appearance....
Changing Colors
Colors used in Time & Sales Window can be adjusted under Colors
section of the Appearance settings window.
1.
executed.
2.
Foreground column. Select the color of the text to be used for an each level in Time & Sales Window.
3.
Backgound column. Select the color of the background to be used for an each level in Time & Sales Window.
2.
354
adjusted.
Manual. Select this mode and set the number of rows to be fixed
Date
Time
Price
Volume
2.
3.
4.
Set comparison condition (=, >, <, >=, <= , != (not equal));
5.
6.
Filter Defaults
355
To save the current settings as default check Use as Default check box.
To reset configuration to default settings click the Reset to Defaults button.
Note: The configuration indicated on a screenshot nearby is pre-defined Default settings of Time & Sales Window
filters.
356
QuoteManager
Managing Data
Data Cache
The subsequent loading of previously created charts with multi-tick count-based resolutions is drastically
accelerated by use of "Cache" technology.
Whenever the basic tick data is converted to a complex count-based resolution (for example, to 64-tick bars), the
converted data is stored in the cache for future use.
As much of the stored data segment as possible is used when another chart with the same resolution is plotted.
When a previously created chart is reloaded, the stored data is also used.
The cache can be cleared, forcing a fresh set of data to be loaded and used.
To clear the Cache:
1.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
Right-click on the symbol, for which the cache must be cleared, and then click Clear Cache.
3.
In the dialog box that appears, click OK to clear the cache for that symbol, or click Cancel to cancel the
operation.
Editing Data
This QuoteManager tool is necessary to review and edit data. It helps to quickly find and correct the bad ticks as
well as add or delete new data.
2.
3.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary resolution type from the Resolution drop-down list.
2.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary field from the Field drop-down list.
Note: In the field section only those fields are displayed for which the data is collected.
3.
In the Data Settings section, select the necessary time zone from the Time Zone drop-down list. 3 time zones
In the Data Range section, enter the necessary date in the Start field or use the drop-down calendar. Then
In the Data Range section, enter the necessary date in the End field or use the drop-down calendar. Then enter
Press the Load button and the loaded data will be displayed in the Data section.
Note: For the quotes with the tick resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Price and Volume values.
Note: For the quotes with the minute resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Up
Volume, Down Volume, Unchanged Volume, Total Volume, Up Ticks, Down Ticks, Unchanged Ticks and Total Ticks
values.
Note: For the quotes with the day resolution there will be displayed the Date, Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Up
Volume, Down Volume, Unchanged Volume, Total Volume, Up Ticks, Down Ticks, Unchanged Ticks, Total Ticks and
Open Interest values.
358
Deleting Data
To delete a quote or several quotes:
In the Data section select the necessary quote or quotes and press the Delete button.
Finding Data
To find the necessary quote or quotes:
1.
Press the Find button and the Find and Goto window will appear.
2.
3.
On the Find tab select from the 1st drop-down list according to what value the necessary quote or quotes
should be found.
4.
On the Find tab select from the 2nd drop-down list the necessary condition of the search.
5.
Enter in the field (s) the necessary number (or percent) corresponding to the selected condition.
6.
To find quote by quote, press the Find button. The Find button will change in the Find Next button, if you want
To mark all the quotes corresponding to the selected conditions, press the Mark All button.
8.
Press the Close button to close the Find and Goto window.
Editing Data
Going to Data
To go to the necessary quote:
1.
Press the Find button and the Find and Goto window will appear.
2.
3. On the GoTo tab select from the 1st drop-down list according to what value the necessary quote should be
found.
4.
On the GoTo tab in the 2nd field enter the necessary date or use the drop-down calendar.
5.
6.
7.
Press the Close button to close the Find and Goto window.
Exporting Data
The quotes saved in the storage can be exported to a text file (ASCII) or a .qmd file (MultiCharts data format).
The program allows the user to specify the necessary data columns and their order as well as the start/end
date/time.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Export Data and click Export All Instruments ;or Click
3.
4.
Click Next
5.
Enter the name of the *.qmd file and choose the path where it will be located.
6.
Click Next
7.
Click Finish.
To export data for a particular instrument / group of instruments into an .qmd file (MultiCharts data format):
1.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). The program always uses the symbol's Price
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Export Data and click Export Instruments ;or Click the
Export Data
4.
5.
Click Next
6.
Enter the name of the *.qmd file and choose the path where it will be located.
7.
Click Next
8.
Click Finish.
Exporting Data
To export data into an ASCII file:
1.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). The program always uses the symbol's Price
On the File menu, click Export Data, or click the Export Data
4.
5.
6.
In the Time Expressed in indicate the time zone for the quotes date/time.
7.
To select the time period for exporting data set the Start Date/Start Time and End Date/End Time.
8.
To change column order, click the header and keep down the left mouse button as you drag the column to its
desired place.
The order of the columns do not matter. However, each column must contain the same type of data.
In the example above, the second field of every row must be the Description field. The third field of every row
must be the "Exchange" field.
Import Symbol List
To open QuoteManager:
361
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select File in the main menu and then select Import Symbol List. The Import Symbols Wizard window will
appear.
3.
Use the Browse button to select the text file. Select Next.
4.
In the Start Import at Row number box, enter the row number to start the import. Select Next.
For example, if the first row of the text file contains header names instead of symbol data, then start the import at
row 2.
5.
In Set Data Delimiters, select the type of delimiter used in the text file.
6.
Select the Treat Consecutive Delimiters as One checkbox to consider consecutive delimiters the same as one
delimiter. If this box is checked, consecutive delimiters will not be considered as an empty field.
7.
Choose the text qualifier from the Text Qualifier drop down list. Select Next.
For example, if a text field can have double quotes around it (e.g., MSFT) . If the double quote text qualifier is
selected, then MultiCharts will recognize that the user wishes to import MSFT without the quotes.
8.
Use the drop down lists to assign the column names to the columns in the text file. Select Next.
9.
In the Select Data Source drop down list, select the data source for the symbols.
10. If the Exchange and Category columns were not previously assigned to a column in the text file, then use the
Exchange and Category drop-down lists to specify the information.
11. Select Finish. The symbols will be imported into QuoteManager.
Importing Data
Importing .qmd data (MultiCharts data format)
1.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Import Data and click Import Instruments
3.
4.
Click Next
5.
6.
situations requiring the user to interfere, mostly because of improper file structure or if the program cannot make
up a conclusion on its structure.
Note: For more information on known import limitations see ASCII Import Limitations section. Be careful when
importing files.
see how
2.
Select a symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section). If the selected symbol contains quotes with
the same timestamp as in the file, they'll be overwritten without warning. Make sure the symbol's price scale
matches the price scale of the input data file. The program always uses the symbol's price scale when importing.
3.
Make sure the file you wish to import is a 1 Tick, Minutes or 1 Day. If a file contains bars, but has no static
time increment, this is a Tick\Volume Bar file and must be processed using ASCII Mapping. 4. On the File menu,
click Import Data, or click the Import Data
5.
6.
Indicate the Path. The path can be typed in, pasted from the clipboard or selected using the mouse. The
selected path persists after converting the file so on next operation the previous path will be used by default. If it is
necessary to move up a level, click the Up icon. To change the method of displaying files click the rightmost icon
Views and select an option from the drop down menu.
7.
8. If the Contents of the selected file field the information is garbled, choose the proper encoding in the File
origin.
9.
Make sure the Resolution is valid. If the value is not correct, the possible causes may be the reason:
The Date field is not defined or not properly defined To set date:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
* sign means that length of chunk is undefined;Example: To convert date 1 Feb 2002 (2/1/2002) type *d mmm
set time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
Allowed symbols in template for Time: h - hour, m - minute, s - second, t - time modifier AM/PM.
363
@ sign splits the whole template and time modifier PM lexem.Example: To convert time 9:20 PM type *h:*m
To set Start at Row You should indicate how many lines to skip.
After those parameters have been properly set, the program analyses the file again and sets the proper Resolution.
10. Select Field Ask, Bid or Trade to define what king of data the file contains.
11. In the Time Zone please select the time zone of the quotes' origin.
12. If the price or volume needs to be multiplied or divided, select a proper factor in Price Multiplier or Volume
Multiplier.
13. To select the time period for importing data set the Start Date/Start Date Time and End Date/End Date Time.
Invalid structure
Example 1. Two of the four necessary bar components are missing:
05-12-69 46.4 33.9
12-12-69 51.7 34.5
19-12-69 55.2 31
Example 2. Date is missing:
1.2061,
1.2065,
1.2061,
1.2065
Incomplete data
Example 1. File has a damaged string:
2 /28/2002 10:45 31505 31530 31480 31480 125
/28/2002 10:50 31480 31505 31480 31500 44
86 2
42
2 /28/ 20
Example 2. File has variable number of columns:
12-D,10/01/1995,3.51,3.53,3.5,3.5,0,2643200,,,
12-D,11/01/1995,3.44,3.53,3.43,3.44,0,501600,0,,
12-D,12/01/1995,3.45,3.5,3.41,3.45,0,1545600,0.017544,,
12-D,13/01/1995,3.34,3.47,3.34,3.44,0,2353600,-0.038184,,
12-D 16/01/1995,3.39,3.41,3.34,3.35,0,1897600,-0.023325,,
12-D,17/01/1995,3.47,3.5,3.38,3.41,0,7425600,-0.011461,,
12-D,18/01/1995,3.45,3.5,3.41,3.5,0,766400,0.002903,-3.518377,
364
Logical errors
Example 1. The file has a 60 minute interval, but with 1759 instead of 1800:
<TICKER>,<PER>,<DTYYYYMMDD>,<TIME>,<OPEN>,<HIGH>,<LOW>,<CLOSE>
EURUSD,I,19980420,160000,1.1005,1.1010,1.1005,1.1010
EURUSD,I,19980420,170000,1.1003,1.1003,1.1003,1.1003
EURUSD,I,19980420,175900,1.1012,1.1012,1.1012,1.1012
EURUSD,I,19980420,200000,1.1012,1.1016,1.1009,1.1015
EURUSD,I,19980420,210000,1.1017,1.1020,1.1000,1.1006 Example
2. Time is not ordered chronologically:
GBPUSD,19890627,0,2200,15457,B,N,N
GBPUSD,19890627,0,2200,15462,A,N,N GBPUSD,19890627,1,0100,15485,B,N,N
GBPUSD,19890627,1,0100,15493,A,N,N
Mapping ASCII
Sometimes importing data to the database is extremely complicated or outright impossible.
In such a case ASCII mapping is the solution; there are two principal reasons for using ASCII mapping:
1.
If one or several ASCII files constantly used are periodically updated. Even if there are just a few updates per
When mapping, the file path and format is indicated once, and every time a chart is created the program finds the
file automatically, converts it into the necessary format based on the preset configuration and displays the data.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the File menu, click Map ASCII.
3.
4.
In the Get Symbol From indicate File Name for the program to extract the symbol name from the filename. If
along with quotes the file contains the symbol name as one of the columns, indicate File's Field.
5.
Use Get name from to characters, if a part of the word must be used.
6.
If the symbol name needs to be edited manually, click the corresponding cell.
365
7.
Make sure the program has correctly defined the Resolution for every file you intend to map. If you see an
error, click the hyperlinked file name. In the window that appears check:
set date:
1.
Mapping ASCII
2.
3.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
set time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a template. If the number of symbols in the date changes, use an asterisk * to replace the symbol,
To set a time template, e.g. 5:22 PM, the template must look like H:MM tt@PM, where tt means the postfix
Wrong detection
starting line of quotes
of
the
To set Start at Row You should indicate how many lines to skip.
2.
3.
After those parameters have been properly set, the program analyses the file again and sets the proper Resolution.
The program will automatically apply the edited template for all files with the same structure, so the user does not
have to edit every file manually.
8.
Indicate the Category, Exchange, Field, TimeZone, Price and Volume Multiplier for all symbols. If the same
value is to be used in several cells, the program supports copying and multi-pasting.
9.
Make sure the check box is checked for files to be mapped. If all fields are filled, the program checks the check
box on the left, indicating that the file is ready for mapping.
10. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Online Mode Data Collection
366
Connecting symbols
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select a symbol or several symbols.
Note: Use Ctrl and (or) Shift buttons to select several symbols.
3.
Right-click and select Fields to collect or in the menu select Edit and click Fields to collect.
In the Settings window select the fields and the resolution type to collect.
Note: Click the Check all button to select all the fields and resolution types.
5.
Check the Apply to all symbols check box to apply these settings to all symbols.
Note: If several symbols are selected this check box will not be available.
6.
Click OK.
7.
Right-click anywhere on selected symbol(s) and select Connect Symbol(s) or in the menu select Edit and click
Connect Symbol(s).
Disconnecting symbols
1. Open QuoteManager window
To open QuoteManager:
2.
3.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select the symbol(s) to be disconnected.
Right-click anywhere on selected symbol(s) and select Disconnect
367
1.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click Activate. The data source is now marked in green
and the Settings, Name and Abbr parameters can now be edited.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click Deactivate. The data source is now marked in
red and the Settings, Name and Abbr parameters cannot be edited.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Settings button.
369
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Clone button.
4.
5.
Note: Only Universal DDE data source can be cloned with different from original Universal DDE settings. All other
data vendors will be simply duplicated and use the same connection settings.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Edit button.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Tools menu, click Data Sources, or click the Data Sources
icon on the toolbar.
3.
Select the data source using the keyboard or mouse and click the Delete button.
370
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol, then click Manually, or Click the Add Symbol
3.
Select a Data Source from the list. If the desired data vendor is not listed, it could be that the vendor is not
5.
6.
Select the Exchange from the list. If the desired exchange is not listed, see the Exchanges section.
7.
Click OK.
8.
To open QuoteManager:
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol.
3.
4.
Choose a data source from the Data Source list; the Insert Symbols into Portfolio window will open. If a data
data source does not support a symbol list (the symbol must be added manually)
5.
6.
Enter all or part of the symbol name into the Symbol box and click Lookup.
Note: Additional search options may be available depending on data source selected.
7.
8.
Click Add. A message that you have added it to your database should appear.
Note: If there is a message You must create *** exchange first, it means that a symbol that is added has an
exchange that is not in the list of exchanges in QuoteManager. All that you need to do is to add the required
exchange to the list with correct corresponding abbreviation (see Setting Exchanges & ECNs).
9.
Unique Features of Specific Data Sources in Insert Symbols into Portfolio Window
Interactive Brokers
When adding instruments from Interactive Brokers there is Cash tab instead of Forex. Enter the first currency of the
instrument to search for all pairs starting with this currency. One can also specify the second currency of the symbol
in Currency field on the tab to get the specific currency pair.
When adding futures contracts from Interactive Brokers, you can check Include Expired Contracts box to get expired
individual contracts to create Custom Futures in MultiCharts (see Custom Futures).
IWBank QuickTrade
When adding Instruments from IWBank QuickTrade, you should enter the symbol name in the Symbol field, specify
Category, select an Exchange from the list and click Search. There is no All Exchanges option in the Exchange list for
IWBank QuickTrade.
TradeStation
When adding futures contracts from TradeStation, you can check Include Expired Contracts box to get expired
individual contracts to create Custom Futures in MultiCharts (see Custom Futures).
When adding futures contracts from TradeStation, you can check Show Electronic Contracts Only box.
When adding stocks/indexes/futures/options/funds from TradeStation, you can check select All Countries, United
States or Germany in Country field.
Zen-fire/Rithmic 01
In Search Options field Symbol, Symbol Root or Description can be selected. It is also possible to specify the
Exchange, however it is not recommended since exchange names on data source end and in MultiCharts may slightly
differ.
Troubleshooting
Establishing connection and processing data requests can be reviewed in the Event Log window of QuoteManager
when a chart is plotted or data is requested from QuoteManager or Portfolio Backtester.
Event Log is located at the bottom of QuoteManager by default. One can show/hide it by clicking View in
QuoteManager main window and selecting Event Log.
If you experience any issues with incoming data, the first step is to check Event Log messages.
372
AvaTrade
To Set up AvaTrade data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select AvaTrade in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Barchart
To set up Barchart data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Barchart in the list of supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Barchart Data Feed
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
Default Settings are recommended to be used. If Barchart provided specific custom settings, click the Custom
Settings button. Price, Port and Historical URL fields become active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
373
CQG
To connect MultiCharts to CQG data feed, it is necessary to have CQG API installed on the computer. Also, please
make sure that your PC meets CQG requirements and technical specifications http:/ / www. cqg. com/ Docs/
CQGTraderSystemSpecs. pdf
If there are any CQG applications installed on your PC, it is required to delete them prior to installing the supported
version of CQG API:
1.
2.
Control Panel
3.
4.
CQG Trader
CQGNet
5.
If you are using MultiCharts 8.5 Release or Release Candidate, install the following version of CQG API:
https://dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4.05. 101_Install. msi
If you are using MultiCharts 8.0 Release or any previous version, install the following version of CQG API: https:/ /
dl.dropbox. com/u/95112551/ Multicharts_COMAPI_en-US_production_V4. 04.542_Install.msi
At the moment it is not possible to use multiple CQG/AMP accounts in MultiCharts. Only one and the same account
should be used for getting data and trading. If different logins and passwords are entered in data source
configuration and CQG broker profile, connection to data source will work, the broker profile will not.
AMP accounts originally created for a different software will not work in MultiCharts. Customers need to contact
AMP directly to setup their accounts for MultiCharts or request a demo account here: [1]
Indexes are available in MultiCharts 8.5 beta 1 or higher. Indexes data is available for Live CQG/AMP accounts only.
At the moment only real-time data is available for CQG Indexes, no historical backfill from data source. To learn how
to store real-time data locally, read this article.
To set up CQG data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select CQG in the list of
should be done upon first connection after API installation. You can start MultiCharts in regular mode after
that)
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
CSI
To connect MultiCharts to CSI data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed and launched on the
computer.
In order to receive data in MultiCharts, the data should be loaded first in CSI software.
To download CSI software, please, contact CSI directly: http://www.csidata. com/ ?page_id=21
To set up CSI data feed connection, in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
Select CSI in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Dukascopy
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Dukascopy. Jforex API is not supported in MultiCharts.
Limitation: does not provide historical data.
It is important to make sure that Dukascopy is informed FIX API is required when subscribe to their service. A
customer needs to provide Dukascopy with his/her IP address to register it on their servers.
Note: To receive data and trade with Dukascopy in MultiCharts, a customer needs to open an account, but since FIX
API is used, such type of account can be opened only if the balance is more than $100 000.
To set up Dukascopy data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Dukascopy in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Dukascopy Data
Server IP section.
Server IP.
375
ESignal
To connect MultiCharts to eSignal data feed, it is necessary to have eSignal software (Data Manager) installed and
launched on the computer.
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up eSignal software automatically when data is
requested.
To download the latest version of eSignal software, follow this link: http:// www. esignal. com/products/ download.
aspx
To set up eSignal data feed connection in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources,
find eSignal in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
FreeQuotes
Free Quotes data feed is configured correctly by default and one can plot a chart using a number of prebuilt symbols
from Free Quotes. That is free end-of-day historical daily bars coming from Yahoo, Google and MSN. Only Stocks
and Indexes are available from this data source in MultiCharts.
To set up Free Quotes data feed connection
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources, find Free Quotes in the list of all
supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Free Quotes Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
One can check/uncheck Yahoo, Google and MSN servers to receive data from.
One can move Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by selecting any of them and clicking the Up and Down buttons
One can disable Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by selecting any of them clicking the Disable button.
One can edit number and timeout of attempts to request data from Yahoo, Google and MSN servers by editing
GlobalServer
MultiCharts provides seamless integration with Global Server (Global Server is used as an external database)
meaning that you will see every tick from your Global Server in MultiCharts. This can be a very useful solution for
longtime users of TradeStation 2000i.
To connect MultiCharts to Global Server (TradeStation 2000i) data feed, it is necessary to have Global Server installed
and launched on the computer.
376
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up Global Server software automatically when data is
requested.
To set up Global Server (TradeStation 2000i) data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources. Select Global Server in the list of
all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The Global Server Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
Global Server Program Directory and Vendor DLL are specified automatically.
Settings section.
Uncheck the Get data from local GlobalServer box for users of TSDataHub as an adapter that is used for Global
Server on multiple computers.
To save data from Global Server in MultiCharts database check the Save data to local database box.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Interactive Brokers
To connect MultiCharts to Interactive Brokers (IB) data feed, it is necessary to have IB software installed and
launched on the computer.
When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up IB software automatically when data is requested. IB
has 2 applications that can be used for connection MultiCharts to IB:
1.
2.
IB Gateway.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Note: By default in IB Gateway Socket port number is 4001. In IB data source in QuoteManager default Port (Socket
port) number is 7496. The ports should be the same.
It is recommended to add 127.0.0.1 to Trusted IP Addresses.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools, then click Data Sources and click on Interactive Brokers.
2.
In the popped up window choose whether you have a standalone installed on your PC version of IB TWS / IB
Click Ok.
4.
Once you clicked Ok, the Interactive Brokers Data Feed Configuration window is opened. It is recommended to
Connectivity section.
Make sure the Server IP Address and Port numbers are correct.
IB TWS can be launched automatically by MultiCharts on attempt to add a symbol from IB data source; once a
chart, DOM, Market Scanner window with IB instrument is open. To enable this option check Launch Trader
Workstation at start box.
There is no need to reconfigure settings in this section. It is set up by default. ==Advanced users can check/uncheck
the following options.==
Regular Trading Hours. Check the box to have standard trading session for daily-based charts.
If the box is checked, MultiCharts assumes that the interval that has no minute data from server also doesnt have
tick data.
It is not recommended to check this function to avoid possible problems with mixing session settings and missing
bars on chart.
If the box is checked the data is requested for all symbols simultaneously, not in a particular order.
Utilization of cache for real-time price data.Example: historical minutes are requested as minutes from server
up to the latest one. The latest historical is plotted from ticks up to the present moment. All the data that is collected
in real-time (ticks) is used to build minutes
Plot ticks either from 1 second snapshots or 5 second snapshots from server.
Real-Time section.
Time of Trades is taken from IB servers. Does not apply to Ask and Bid data for Forex symbols. It is not recommended
to check this function to avoid potential problems with session settings and missing bars on chart.
378
Turn on this function if you need total volume for the session. By default it is turned off. When turn on, the Trade
Tick Volume = current TotalVolume previous TotalVolume. This option also helps to avoid spikes coming from IB
API in real-time feed.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
IQFeed
To connect MultiCharts to IQFeed data, it is necessary to have IQFeed software installed and launched on the
computer. When the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up IQFeed software automatically when data
is requested. To download the latest version of IQFeed client click here.
To set up IQFeed data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources. Select IQFeed in the list of all
supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The IQFeed Data Feed Configuration window is opened.
2.
Authority section.
Check the Build minute and daily bars based on tick data box to request only tick data from IQfeed server and
build all other resolution charts out of tick data.
Note: IQFeed provide less tick data comparing to minute or daily data.
Real-Time section.
Check the Generate a new Ask/Bid tick if Trade changes box to make snapshots of Ask/Bid streams and show them
in MultiCharts only at the moment when a new Trade comes.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select IWBank QuickTrade in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
379
3.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
LMAX
To Set up LMAX data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select LMAX in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Since MultiCharts 8.7 beta 1 it is possible to cache historical data downloaded from LMAX to speed up data
backfilling. To enable caching downloaded data:
1.
Open QuoteManager,
2.
3.
4.
Highlight LMAX,
5.
Click Settings,
6.
7.
MB Trading
To connect MultiCharts to MB Trading data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed on the computer.
1.
To download the latest version of MBT Desktop, follow this link: http:/ / www. mbtrading. com/ mbtDesktop.
aspx.
2.
To get latest version of MBT Desktop PRO, follow this link: http://www.mbtrading.com/mbtDesktopPro. aspx
Note: MB Trading software and MultiCharts should not be launched simultaneously.
On the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select MB Trading in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
2.
In the opened up window enter your Login, Password and click Ok.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
380
2.
In the Data Sources window select MCFX in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
In the opened up window enter your User Name, Password in Authority section.
4.
In the Connectivity section make sure that the Server is 74.200.223.66 and Port is 10000 and click OK.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
Metastock
To connect MultiCharts to Metastock data feed, it is necessary to have their database files on the computer.
Limitation: 65000 bars per symbol limitation To set up Metastock data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select Metastock in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
2.
In the opened up window locate the path to Metastock files by clicking the Add button. You can also delete
the location by clicking the Delete button. Up and Down buttons can be used to change the priority of requests to
the file locations.
3.
4.
Automatic.
Manual.
One can specify the resolution types in the files to build greater resolutions in MultiCharts from them: minute and
daily bars.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
381
MIG Bank
To set up MIG Bank data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources window. Select MIG Bank in the
list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button. The MIG Bank Data Feed Configuration window is
opened.
2.
Open E Cry
Does not provide expired futures contracts.
Since MultiCharts 8.0 beta 3 UUID connection type has been implemented. UUID connection greatly improves
reliability using OEC Trader and MultiCharts at same time with same username.
Important Information:Existing OEC customers need to enable third party software at Open E Cry web page .
Introducing brokers (such as Global Futures) clients should use this link: Open E Cry Portal web page.
If MultiCharts is not enabled on Open E Cry web page, the connection will not be established.
To set up Open E Cry data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Open E Cry in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the Server Name and Port number are correct.
If the box is checked the data is requested for all symbols simultaneously, not in a particular order.
Utilization of cache for real-time price data.Example: Historical minutes are requested as minutes from server
up to the latest one. The latest historical is plotted from ticks up to the present moment. All the data that is collected
in real-time (ticks) is used to build minutes.
Patsystems
To set up Patsystems data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Patsystems in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
The Demo Mode box: check it to enable Patsystems data feed demo mode. In this mode Internet connection is not
required, the data is generated randomly and orders are not sent to the broker.
Enter Login and Password.
License (default value is FBD653F002), Environment, Application ID and Application Version fields are filled by
default; however if the broker provides different settings, enter them into these fields.
SSL section.
To use SSL certificate provided by Patsystems, check the Use SLL and enter its name.
Rithmic 01
To set up Rithmic 01 data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Rithmic 01 in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected deployment is Rithmic 01 if you have real account. If you have simulation account,
select Zen-Fire/Rithmic Server Sim.
Do not change default connection settings in this section.
383
TradeNode
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and TradeNode. To connect MultiCharts to TradeNode data
feed, it is necessary to have TradeNode Gateway installed and launched on the computer. More about installation
TradeNode software follow this link: http://support. tradenode. com
To download the latest version of TradeNode software, follow this link: http://support. tradenode. com
To set up TradeNode data feed connection in the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data
Sources, find TradeNode in the list of all supported data vendors and make sure that is active.
For More Information about TradeNode follow this link http:/ / tradenode. com To add an instrument manually or
from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
TradeStation
Tradestation
To connect MultiCharts to TradeStation data feed, it is necessary to have their software installed and launched on
the computer.
If the connection is set up correctly, MultiCharts brings up TradeStation software automatically when data is
requested.
To download the latest version of TradeStation, follow the link and login to TradeStation Client Center: https:/ /
clientcenter.tradestation. com
To set up TradeStation data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select TradeStation in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Select the version of TradeStation installed on your computer from the TradeStation versions list.
Settings section.
Check the Save data to database box if you want to store the data in QuoteManager and not to request it from
TradeStation next time you plot the same instrument.
To add an instrument manually or from data source, see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List.
384
Trading Technologies
FIX API is used for connection between MultiCharts and Trading Technologies.
Limitation: does not provide histporical data.
To set up Trading Technologies data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Trading Technologies in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Universal DDE
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) is a widely used protocol for exchanging data between applications in the MS
Windows environment.
Please see the Developer's website for more detailed information on DDE.
User-definable DDE Server/Topic/Item for Trade Price, Trade Volume, Bid Price, Bid Size, Ask Price, Ask Size
Support for various server types. Some DDE servers contradict the Microsoft specifications.
For maximal user convenience the program has a set of deeply customizable options (not described here).
Limitations
Presently the following field types are not supported: Time, Open, High, Low, Close, Total Volume, Change
The program receives ticks only and assigns the current system time to them. Sometimes the tick's real time
The Status Bar is not displayed on the chart as there aren't enough fields to chart it
385
Setting up
1.
2.
3.
4.
Indicate the DDE Links in the corresponding sections (the sections include Trade, Bid and Ask. The Price and
Volume/Size must be indicated in each section; if Volume/Size cannot be used (e.g for Forex), indicate Price instead.
Since for every price the program queries for a volume, this field will never be empty as the program will be waiting
for volume data to form a new tick.
5.
Before creating DDE links in Universal DDE make sure they are functional in Excel.
After that, copy the link to the corresponding field in Universal DDE and replace the static symbol name with the
asterisk symbol *.
For instance, replace =WINROS|LAST!MSFT with =WINROS|LAST!*. After that the program will automatically use
the symbol name for which the given template is used. Do the same for all fields.
6.
To make sure that the created template is functional, click Test. Enter the symbol name in Symbol and click
OK. If the DDE Server is running, the template is properly created and the queried symbol is accessible, you'll see
the current value for each field and the number of updates. If quotes do not arrive, check the template and symbol
name.
If fixing them does not resolve the problem, please send an e-mail to [email protected] [2] and indicate the
DDE Server, symbol and template names, confirm that an identical template functions in Excel and share any other
information you deem important.
To create a symbol using Universal DDE as the Data Source see Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol list section for more
detailed information.
To use several DDE servers at once You should clone the Universal DDE and assign new settings.
See Cloning Data Sources section for more detailed information.
ZenFire
Zen-Fire provides a very limited amount of historical data; historical tick data is only available for the current session,
though minute date is available over a somewhat longer time span. To set up Zen-Fire data feed connection:
1.
In the QuoteManager main menu select Tools and then click Data Sources.
2.
Select Zen-Fire in the list of all supported data vendors and click the Settings button.
3.
Authority section.
Connectivity section.
Make sure that the selected Deployment is Zen-Fire if you have real account. If you have simulation account, select
Zen-Fire/Rithmic Server Sim.
Do not change default connection settings in this section.
The Reset button nearby Deployment is to restore correct settings.
386
387
Setting Exchanges
Setting Exchanges & ECNs
This tool allows adding/removing Exchanges/ECNs and editing their parameters.
The Exchanges/ECNs parameters are inherited by the symbols, so the better are the Exchanges/ECNs tuned in, the
higher will be the overall quality of the system performance.
Sometimes the Exchange/ECN settings aren't the same for all the symbols traded on a given Exchange/ECN.
So the user is able to edit settings on a symbol-by-symbol basis, although in the majority of cases the Exchange/ECN
settings are exactly the same as the individual symbol settings.
Adding an Exchange/ECN
1.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Click Add.
4.
Enter the Exchange/ECN name. This name must be informative for convenience and consist of the full
exchange name, up to 50 characters long. This full name will not be used on the Symbol list and in the symbol
settings.
5.
Enter the Abbr. This short name, up to 7 characters long will be used for exchange identification, use the
Select the Holiday List. See Holidays section for more information; if you do not want to use the Holiday List,
select None.
7.
Select a Price Scale corresponding to most symbols traded at the selected Exchange/ECN.
8.
9.
388
12. On the Time Zone tab set the exchange's time zone. This can be done either using From System Options or
Custom options. Selecting From System Options will set the OS time zone settings, which is usually correct; you
might have to set the time zone and daylight savings settings by using Custom.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Click Delete.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
Click Edit.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Exchanges & ECNs, or click the Exchanges & ECNs
3.
4.
5.
Example: If you need to add NASD exchange, you can simply clone NASDAQ exchange settings and change the
abbriviation (Abbr) to NASD.
Setting Holidays
This tool is used to indicate the days when the exchanges do not work to avoid gaps on the charts.
The holidays are divided into holiday lists so one select holidays by nation or other parameter.
389
Adding Holidays
1.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
4.
5.
Enter the holiday name in the Description field, select the date and click Ok.
Editing Holidays
1.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
4.
5.
6.
Change the holiday name in the Description field, select the date and click Ok.
Removing Holidays
1.
To open QuoteManager:
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
3.
Select the desired holiday list from the Holiday List' list.
4.
5.
Note: Check Do not use holidays check box to disable holidays for all exchanges.
390
Setting Symbols
Operating Symbol List
Symbol List is a list of commonly used financial instruments. Modern-day investors need easy access to any of the
trading vehicles.
QM has been developed based on those needs, the basic requirements being:
Rapid data access, which means powerful search, sorting, and selection capabilities
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol, then click Manually, or Click the Add Symbol
3.
Select a Data Source from the list. If the desired data vendor is not listed, it could be that the vendor is not
5.
6.
Select the Exchange from the list. If the desired exchange is not listed, see the Exchanges section.
7.
Click OK.
8.
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
On the Symbol menu, select Add Symbol.
3.
4.
Choose a data source from the Data Source list; the Insert Symbols into Portfolio window will open. If a data
data source does not support a symbol list (the symbol must be added manually)
5.
6.
Enter all or part of the symbol name into the Symbol box and click Lookup.
Note: Additional search options may be available depending on data source selected.
7.
8.
Click Add. A message that you have added it to your database should appear.
Note: If there is a message You must create *** exchange first, it means that a symbol that is added has an
exchange that is not in the list of exchanges in QuoteManager. All that you need to do is to add the required exchange
to the list with correct corresponding abbreviation (see Setting Exchanges & ECNs).
9.
To select many sequential symbols at once with the mouse keep Ctrl pressed and click the symbols.
If you need to select several non-sequential symbols using the keyboard, start on the first symbol, press and keep
down Ctrl and move the selection border to the desired position using the Up/Down Arrows, Home/End or Page
Up/Page Down, then press Space. To perform such selection with the mouse keep Ctrl pressed and click the symbols
to be selected.
Note: To select all symbols, select Edit in the main menu and then click Select All, or use the Ctrl+A keyboard
shortcut.
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Select the symbols to be deleted.
3.
Selecting Symbol on the main menu and then clicking Delete Symbol
2.
3.
or:
1.
2.
The arrow on the heading indicates the sorting direction; click the column to reverse the sorting direction.
3.
Right-click a column heading to call up a context menu with sorting options. See Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol
List section.
Select All Symbols in the left panel to search a list of all symbols, or select a particular symbol category.
2.
3.
Start typing the symbol name; as the name is being typed, the selection will move between symbols seeking
for a match.
Note: Each consecutive character in a symbol name must be typed with an interval of no more the one second; if
you pause for more then one second, a new search will be started, for a symbol name beginning with the first
character that was typed after a pause of more than a second.
To start a new search without waiting for the second to be over, simply press the ESC key.
Example: To search for AMD, type a m d with an interval of less than a second between each character; if you pause
for more than a second after typing a, once you type m, the first symbol, beginning with the character "m", will be
located instead.
A Full String search can be used to find multiple symbols that satisfy the search criteria. To
perform a Full String search:
1.
Select All Symbols in the left panel to search a list of all symbols, or select a particular symbol category.
2.
Select Edit in the main menu, and then click Find, or use the CTRL+F keyboard shortcut; a Find dialog box will
open.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A previously performed search can be repeated by simply pressing the F3 key, without opening the Find dialog box.
2.
3.
Use the Move Up and the Move Down buttons to change the order in which the columns are displayed.
4.
Enter the desired width, in pixels, in to the The selected column should be N pixels box.
394
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Add.
4.
5.
Select Session Time. This option indicates the time used for setting sessions.
6.
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Edit.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Session Templates, or click the Session Templates
3.
Click Delete.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
3.
4.
5.
Select the number and type of the days that the contracts come into effect; 6. Select the rule that will set the
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
3.
4.
5.
Change the number and type of the days that the contracts come into effect; 6. Change the rule that will set
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
On the Tools menu, click Expiration Rules, or click the Expiration Rules
3.
4.
Settings Properties
It is possible to modify symbol properties in QuoteManager. Every symbol has a set of properties. Data Source,
Category, Exchange & ECN, Symbol Name and Symbol Root are the mandatory properties.
396
In case the symbol was added from a list supplied by data vendor all mandatory and most optional properties are
already set according to data vendor requirements.
It is possible to modify propeties only after the symbol is already added to the symbol list.
In case the symbol was added manually all mandatory (except Symbol Root) and some optional properties are
already set.
It is possible to modify propeties while creating a symbol as well as after the symbol is already added to the symbol
list.
Important: This information can be obtained from the exchanges where the symbol is listed or from a brokerage
firm.
The properties are edited in the Edit Symbol window:
2.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
3.
or
1.
In QuoteManager select the necessary symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section).
2.
3.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
4.
or
1.
In QuoteManager select the necessary symbol (see Selecting Symbol(s) in Symbol list section).
2.
3.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
4.
or
1.
2.
Note: First tab name dynamically changes according to the symbol category set.
3.
Tip: Symbol Root for stocks is the same as the Symbol Root property.
398
Price Scale
Returns a numeric expression representing the fractional portion of a full point move for a particular symbol. The
PriceScale value is represented by a whole number. E.g. the PriceScale of the E-Mini S&P is100, which represents
the fractional portion
of a full point move for the E-Mini S&P. Any stock would also have a PriceScale of 100. 1 / PriceScale = Minimum
price increment. Examples
MinMove / PriceScale returns the smallest increment between trades.
MinMove / PriceScale * BigPointValue returns the dollar value of the smallest change in price.
Tip: MultiCharts can display prices in both decimal and fractional format.
Double click on the symbol in QuoteManager. The Edit Symbol window will appear.
2.
1. In the Settings Details section, select the appropriate Price Scale from the drop-down list. Double click on the
symbol in QuoteManager. The Edit Symbol window will appear.
2.
3.
In the Settings Details section, select the appropriate Price Scale from the drop-down list.
10th
1/10
1/4
0, 0.5
1/2
As shown,
"10th" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.1.
"j" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.25.
"S" means the decimal in the numerator can be in increments of 0.5.
In a user defined price scale range, it is also possible to input numbers in fractional format into
the Maximum and Minimum fields. The numbers will be converted to decimal format when the dialog box is
closed.
However, the price scale on chart will still be in fractional format.
Note: If the price scale of the symbol is already in decimal format and it is changed to fractional format, the chart
must be reloaded for the fractional format to appear.
400
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
Click Tools in the main menu and select Symbol Dictionary, or click the Symbol Dictionary
icon on the
toolbar.
3.
Click the Add button. The New Edit Root Settings window will appear.
4.
5.
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
2.
Click Tools in the main menu and select Symbol Dictionary, or click the Symbol Dictionary
icon on the
toolbar.
3.
Select the symbol root to edit. Click the Edit button. The Edit Root Settings window will appear.
4.
5.
To open QuoteManager:
click the New QuoteManager Window
2.
in the Main menu select File, then point to New and click New QuoteManager Window
Add a new symbol into QuoteManager. Make sure the new symbol's root is the same as the symbol root in
Symbol Dictionary. See Adding Symbol(s) to Symbol List for more information.
3.
2.
Select the symbol in the symbol list, then select Symbol in the main menu and select Edit Symbol, or
3.
4.
5.
In the Settings Source section, select the Use Symbol Dictionary Settings radio button to use the symbol root's
7.
In the Sessions Source section, select the Use Symbol Dictionary Sessions radio button to use the symbol root's
Open Symbol Root settings for the symbol. (see Editing a Symbol Root in Symbol Dictionary)
2.
Add the multiplier rate to the description of the root manually (with asterisk in front, no spaces): *XXX
Note: No other symbol setting should be changed.Example: To get 4 integer and 2 decimal digits price format
for ES symbol from Trading Technologies, add *0.01.
3.
4.
Close MultiCharts and make sure all its processes are ended (see MultiCharts Processes).
5.
After restart of MultiCharts new data coming from Trading Technologies should have the required price format.
Note: After the Multiplier feature has been used it is important to manually remap the symbol in Symbol
Mapping window (see Symbol Mapping) , otherwise the Multiplier won't affect trading and orders will be sent
with incorrect prices.
Note 2: Multiplier feature affects only the data the collected in real-time. All previously collected data will still
have the same price format even if the Multiplier feature is used. If a customer is interested in converting old
data price format, he or she should export the data into ASCII file from the symbol in QuoteManager (see
Exporting Data) to import it back from the file into QuoteManager, using multiplier on import (see How to
import ASCII data).
402
Collecting Data
The program provides optimal performance with various data feeds. Its behavior depends on the data feed
connected; there exist three kinds of data feeds - data feeds that provide real-time only, data feeds that provide
both history and real-time and data feeds that provide history only.
See the Built-In Data Sources table for more detailed information on data feeds.
The program's behavior depending on the data feed type is described below:
Custom Futures
Understanding Custom Futures
Not all data sources provide continuous data. If continuous futures data is not provided by your data feed you can
create continuous symbols within MultiCharts.
Custom Futures is a symbol combined from the individual futures contracts. The data series of Custom Futures is
created by rolling over the data of the individual contracts added to the QuoteManager.
Custom Futures are useful for backtesting and charting purposes due to short operation time of individual futures
contracts. The rollover is performed only on the session end near to the moment of current contract expiration using
the rollover rules based on time and activity.
Custom Futures chart is plotted using the data available for individual contracts added in the QuoteManager.
If there is no data for the symbol in the database the data will be requested from the data feed, similar to plotting
regular contracts charts.
No data message in the status line of the chart can be displayed if all the requested contracts have no data in the
data base and this data cannot be downloaded from the data feed.
Custom Futures limitations:
The resolutions available for Custom Futures are 1 Day and lower (tick, point, contract, change, second,
minute).
404
In the main MultiCharts menu select File, then point to New and click QuoteManager Window.
2.
Select Instrument.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select contracts to use (if they are specified incorrectly in Symbol Dictionary Settings) by clicking on the check
boxes.
8.
To define the serial number of the contract on which the Custom Futures series is based select one of the available
options in the box: Nearest contract, 2nd nearest contract, N nearest contract.
While building a Custom Futures N Nearest contract will be taken for each moment of time. Algorithm of choosing
the rollover date
Event (Volume and/or Open Interest)
When day (Event) rollover is selected, e.g. the next contracts Daily bar volume (Days of Higher) was higher than the
Volume of previous bar for the specified amount of days (1-9).
To select the event condition click Event
To define the rollover condition, select one of the available options in the Days of Higher box: Volume, Open interest,
Open Interest or Volume, Open Interest and Volume.
Time (certain date)
When Time rollover is selected the transition from the previous contract to the next contract is done on the day
defined by displacement into the past from the expiration date for the specified value 0 99 of trading days (
Trading Days Prior to Expiration Date). An additional displacement can be set for the value up to 9 months into the
past using the Offset, i.e. the rollover date is the date obtained by displacement into the past from the Expiration
Date for Offset of months and prior trading days.
To select time condition click Time. In the Offset by Months prior box, enter an amount of months.
405
9.
To define the back adjustment mode, in the Back Adjustment Mode box select one of the available options: no
adjustment, absolute difference, ratio.
Absolute Difference - constant ( = Cnext - Cprev; where Cprev close of the last bar before the rollover point)
is added to all data prior to the rollover date. The data of the last series is not corrected as there was no rollover for
it yet.
If the N contracts are rolled over then the data of the first contract is corrected N-1 times.
Ratio adjustment - all data prior to the rollover point is multiplied on the ratio (C= C next / Cprev). If the N
contracts are rolled over then the data of the first contract is corrected N-1 times.
10. Symbol Code field
Displays rollover encoded in a line. The encoding is done automatically if the information on the Custom Futures tab
is changed. The symbol code can be copied, but cannot be modified.
Symbol Code can be used in Real-time market scanner or Command Line to plot a Custom Futures chart bypassing
the dialogue window.
11. Set the Settings and Sessions tabs of Custom Futures up the same way as for individual contracts.
See Setting Properties section for more information
Troubleshooting
While Plotting a Custom Futures chart you may see yellow alert messages: To construct Custom Futures please add
the following contracts.
406
These alerts appear because Custom futures requests data prior and following the symbols already in the database
based on the selected rollover conditions and data request.
Custom Futures chart can be plotted without adding these symbols, if there are other individual contracts with data
in QuoteManager.
If there are no futures symbols in the data base for creating a Custom Futures, the following alert message will
appear:
407
In most cases supported data sources in MultiCharts provide only historical total tick volume, no up and down
volume. For tick-based resolutions all historical total volume is divided by 2 and allocated to up and down volume.
In most cases supported data sources in MultiCharts provide only historical total tick volume, no up and down
volume. For minute-based and daily-based resolutions all historical total volume is recorded to the data base as
total volume and is also recorded as up volume. Down volume is empty.
If a new tick comes with higher than previous price, the volume is recorded as up volume.
If a new tick comes with lower than previous price, the volume is recorded as down volume.
If a new tick comes with the same as previous price, the volume is recorded either to up or to down volume
depending on what was the last recorded volume.Example: If a new tick comes with higher than previous price
and volume is recorded as up volume, and then another tick comes with the same as previous price, the volume is
recorded also to up volume.
408
PowerLanguage
Language Elements
PowerLanguage is a system of expressing financial instrument trading rules in a systematic and logical way that can
be executed by a computer.
A well-thought-out trading strategy, properly expressed in PowerLanguage, will be carried out with a far greater
speed, accuracy, and persistence then could ever be possible for a human trader.
Implementing trading strategies in PowerLanguage requires familiarity with the basic rules and structure of the
language, outlined below, as well as with the keywords described in the keyword section of this reference guide.
PowerLanguage Studies and Statements
A complete PowerLanguage "program" is called a Script. An example of a script would be a Strategy, a study that
issues trading orders, an Indicator, a study that draws plots on a chart to assist in making trading decisions, or a
Function, an independent procedure (subroutine) that can be called from another script to carry out a specific task.
PowerLanguage scripts consist of at least one, but usually more, statements. A statement is a complete instruction,
and ends with a semi-column (;).
An example of a statement (and of a one-line script):
Buy Next Bar At Open;
Statements are evaluated from left to right, and scripts are evaluated from top to bottom.
Price Charts
A data series consists of groups of price data points, based on a defined interval and arranged in a chronological
order.
The most popular format for visually presenting a data series is a Bar Chart. Each bar, based on a group of price data
points, is a vertical line connecting the High and the Low price points, and graphically represents the range of an
instrument's price movement over a defined interval. The prices of the first (Open) and of the last (Close) price
points of the group, on which the bar is based, are indicated on the line by marks known as the bars Open and Close
components.
PowerLanguage handles price data "packaged" in the form of bars. While bars can be based on a variety of
resolutions, the point of reference is always a "bar".
For example, the following statement places a Buy order at the Open price of the next bar if the previous bar's High
was less then the current bar's Close:
If High 1 Bar Ago < Close Then Buy Next Bar At Open;
Both time and price in the above statement are referenced in terms of bars.
409
A PowerLanguage script evaluates a chart on bar-by-bar basis, starting with the very first (oldest) bar on the chart.
The exact same script is executed for every bar.
After the entire script is executed for the first bar, the second bar is evaluated, and so on to the last bar on the chart.
The bar being currently evaluated by the study is defined as the current bar, and the previous bar is the 1 Bar Ago.
The current bar becomes the 1 Bar Ago once the study moves on to the next bar.
This is a basic overview is intended to give the initial understanding of how PowerLanguage studies function.
A more detailed description of how a chart is evaluated is presented in the How Scripts Work section.
PowerLanguage
Power language allows a combination of keywords, constants, variables, mathematical and logical operators, and
punctuation to be used to express trading rules and bring about both conditional as well as unconditional actions
and output.
There are tools to accomplish a variety of tasks, from the very basic, such as:
Print("My name is Joe");
All the way to array functions available in the advanced programming languages.
Each category of PowerLanguge components is discussed below:
Keywords
Most of the keywords are the instructions, "action words", of PowerLanguage.
Keywords instruct to buy or sell, plot or erase, compare or convert.
410
Some of the keywords are also "nouns", and return specific values or characteristics.
A list of keywords with detailed descriptions and examples is available in the Keyword Reference
Skip Words
Skip words are the interjections of PowerLanguage. They actually do nothing, and are skipped during code execution,
but they make PowerLanguage easier to read.
In PowerLanguage Editor, skip words appear in red. A list of these words is available in the Skip Words section of this
guide.
Operators
There are four types of operators: Mathematical, Relational, Logical, and String.
Mathematical operators are used to perform mathematical operations. There are five available mathematical
operators:
+
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
( ) Parentheses
Relational operators are used to make comparisons. There are six relational operators:
<
Less then
>
Greater than
<=
=>
Equal to
<>
Not equal to
Logical operators are used to perform logical (Boolean) operations. There are two available logical operators: AND
and OR.
There is only one string operator, the plus sign ( + ), is used as follows to combine multiple string expressions in to
one:
"String expression one" + "and string expression two"
The resulting string expression will be:
"String expression one and string expression two"
Referencing previous bars
Previous bars' values can be referenced by using the statement N Bars Ago, or by using the bar offset notation that
consists of a numerical expression enclosed in square brackets:
High 2 Bars Ago or High [2]
411
Indicators
The purpose of indicators is to plot visualizations of mathematical formulas on a chart. The plots are created based
on one or more price data series.
412
When applied to a chart, an indicator script first evaluates all the completed bars one-by-one, starting with the very
first (oldest) bar on the chart.
The entire script is executed once for each completed bar. On each bar, based on the results of the evaluation, an
indicator script can generate output - graph, text, plot color change, audio alert, etc.
If indicator script contains references to previous bars' values, indicator can begin generating output starting with
the first bar that follows the Maximum number of bars a study will reference.
Once all the completed bars on the chart have been evaluated, an indicator script will proceed to evaluate the last
bar on the chart on tick-by-tick basis, without waiting for the bar to be completed. An incomplete bar is a summary
of all ticks received since the previous bar was completed.
Each time a new tick is received, the entire script will be executed for that bar, until the bar is completed and the
next bar is started. Indicator scripts treat incomplete bars the same way as the bars that are completed, and can
take action each time an incomplete bar is evaluated.
Please note that only the last, incomplete, bar is re-evaluated on every new tick, and not the whole series.
The process of evaluation of a bar by an indicator is called a recalculation or an update.
Indicator update on every tick is enabled by default. However, in some instances it may be undesirable for indicators
to be recalculated every time a new tick is received; updating a large number of complex indicators on every tick
will require substantial system resources.
Update on Every Tick option can be turned off in the MultiCharts settings.
The process of automatic MaxBarsBack detection may cause some functions to be executed repeatedly for the first
few bars of a chart when a study is first applied; this can be avoided by setting the MaxBarsBack value manually.
To select the smallest MaxBarsBack value sufficient for a particular study, set the value manually. The recommended
initial MaxBarsBack value is 50.
Signals
Signals are the basic building blocks of strategies. Signals are substantially more complex than indicators and take in
to account a far greater number of factors.
Signals compile strategy performance data and support backtesting and Automated Trade Execution.
When applied to a chart, a signal script first evaluates all the completed bars one-by-one, starting with the very first
( oldest) bar on the chart. The entire script is executed once for each completed bar. On each bar, based on the
results of the evaluation, a signal script may generate one or more trading orders. Orders are indicated by an arrow
or a mark on the chart, by a visual or an audio alert, etc. If signal script contains references to previous bars' values,
signal can begin generating orders staring with the first bar that follows the Maximum number of bars a study will
reference.
By default, once all the completed bars on a chart are evaluated, the execution of a signal script is paused until a
new bar is completed (a bar is completed once an interval, defined for each bar, is over), and then the entire script
is executed again for the new bar.
This signal script execution method can be modified by selecting intra-bar order generation. With intra-bar order
generation enabled, the signal script will evaluate the last bar without waiting for the bar to be completed. Each
time a new tick is received, the last bar will be re-evaluated, until the bar is completed and the next bar is started.
Incomplete bar is a summary of all ticks received since the previous bar was completed. In intra-bar order generation
mode, signal scripts treat incomplete bars the same way as the bars that are completed, and can take actions based
on evaluation of incomplete bars.
Please note that only the last, incomplete bar is re-evaluated on every new tick, and not the whole series.
414
The number of previous bars that must be available for a script in order to start performing calculations is called
Maximum number of bars a study will reference, or MaxBarsBack. The MaxBarsBack value can be selected to be
detected automatically or set manually.
When detected automatically, MaxBarsBack will initially be set to the value of the largest data offset in the study;
however, if a variable data offset is used in the script, the initial MaxBarsBack value may prove to be too small.
In such a case, the MaxBarsBack value will automatically be increased by 5 or by a factor of 1.618, whichever yields
a higher value, and the study recalculated.
The process of automatic MaxBarsBack detection may cause some functions to be executed repeatedly for the first
few bars of a chart when a study is first applied; this can be avoided by setting the MaxBarsBack value manually.
To select the smallest MaxBarsBack value sufficient for a particular study, set the value manually. The recommended
initial MaxBarsBack value is 50.
Learn more about setting MaxBarsBack values for Signals
Flat
Long
Short
Long Entry
Short Entry
Long Exit
Short Exit
Multiple same-direction orders are assigned priority relative to each other based on the order in which the order
statements are listed in the signal script.
When multiple signals are combined to create a strategy, same-direction orders generated by different signals are
assigned priority relative to each other based on the order that the signals appear under the Signals tab in the
Format Objects window.
Once the orders are sorted, the order that has the highest priority is executed. It is important to note that an entry
order in the direction, opposite to the current position, will not simply cover the position, but actually reverse it.
For example, a Long 1 order, executed for a Short 1 position, will result in a Long 1 and not in a Flat position.
415
Taking into account the change in position, resulting from execution of the order, the remaining orders are sorted
again, and the order that has the highest priority is executed.
This procedure is repeated until all the orders are executed, or until none of the orders left can be executed for
example, only Exit orders are left and the position is flat.
If the only Entry orders left are in the same direction as the current position, these orders will only be executed if
Pyramiding is enabled.
Pyramiding settings allow the number of entries in the same direction to be limited to a set number.
Any orders left that could not be executed are discarded.
Order Execution Priority example:
Multiple orders are generated, in the following order: Short Exit, Short Entry, Long Entry, Long Exit, and Long Entry.
The current position is Short.
1. The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long entry, Long entry, Short exit, Short entry (Long exit could not
be executed).
SX SE LE LX
SX SE V LX
LE
LE
3 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Short entry, Long entry, Long exit (Short exit could not be executed
).
4. Short entry is executed; the position is now Short.
SX V V LX
LE
5 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long entry, Short exit (Long exit could not be executed ).
6. Long entry is executed; the position is now Long.
SX V V LX
V
7 . The orders are sorted by priority (in descending order): Long exit (Short exit could not be executed ).
8. Long exit is executed; the position is now Flat.
SX V V V V
9. The only order left, Short exit, can not be executed and is discarded.
SX V V V V
The net result of executing the above orders, from a Short position, will be a Flat position.
416
The EasyLanguage Functions & Reserved Words Reference is a complete reference listing of every
EasyLanguage reserved word and EasyLanguage function. This comprehensive guide gives complete
descriptions, usages, input declarations, and code examples for each EasyLanguage syntax element.
About EasyLanguage
EasyLanguage Resources
This page lists various EasyLanguage resources.
Free Manuals
The Essential EasyLanguage Programming Guide allows you to quickly look up usage and syntax concepts and
examples for the most commonly used features of EasyLanguage.
The EasyLanguage Functions & Reserved Words Reference is a complete reference listing of every
EasyLanguage reserved word and EasyLanguage function. This comprehensive guide gives complete
descriptions, usages, input declarations, and code examples for each EasyLanguage syntax element.
Books
Internet resources
IntraBarPersist alertAlreadyGiven(False);
417
on this bar.
alertAlreadyGiven = True;
end;
// Reset the boolean variable so that an alert can
end;
}
Inputs:
AlertText(StringSimple);
Variables:
IntraBarPersist barNumOfAlert(0);
if (CurrentBar <> barNumOfAlert) then begin
418
Alert(AlertText);
barNumOfAlert = CurrentBar;
end;
AlertOncePerBar = 0; // dummy
Now, if you want to call an alert once per bar (for example, with an EMA crossover), you can call that with:
if (XAverage(Close, 5) crosses above XAverage(Close, 20)) then AlertOncePerBar("EMA cross alert");
419
// 3. Now we can print the current date in a more readable format dateReadable =
FormatDate("dd-MM-yyyy", dateInDateTimeFormat);
Print("The current date in a readable format is: ", dateReadable);
This returns the following:
The current date in YYYMMdd format is: 1120127.00
The current date in DateTime format is: 40935.00000
The current date in a readable format is: 27-01-2012
Of course, not all these steps are needed. The extensive above example can be rewritten to simply:
Print("The current date in a readable format is: ", FormatDate("dd-MM-yyyy", ELDateToDateTime(CurrentDate)));
Which returns:
The current date in a readable format is: 27-01-2012
dateInDateTime(0);
dateInDateTime =
420
dateInDateTime), NewLine);
end;
This gives the following output:
Date in short version: 27-1-12
Date fully written: vrijdag januari 2012 Date in a sentence: The current Date is vrijdag anD the month is januari
(which is month #01). The Year is 2012.
421
PowerLanguage Editor
Default Study Properties
Default study properties include Input Values, Style, and Maximum Bars Back settings.
When a study is applied to a chart, the default settings are used unless the user elects to set the study properties.
To learn more about setting study properties in MultiCharts, see Indicator Settings and Signal Settings
4. In the Color column select the plot color from the drop-down palette box.
5. In the Style column select the plot style from the drop-down list box.
6. In the Weight column select the plot weight from the drop-down list box; the weight can only be selected for the
solid line style.
7. Select the Use as Default check box, and click OK.
Default Study Properties
Right-click within the script display window and then click Properties; or:
Select File in the main menu and click Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab.
3. Clear the Update on every tick check box to recalculate the indicator on bar close only, or select the check box to
recalculate the indicator every time a new tick is received.
4. Select the Use as Default box, and click OK.
Finding Text
To find text:
1. Open the Find window by clicking the Find
Replacing Text
To replace text:
1. Open the Replace window by clicking the Replace
Compiling Scripts
Before a study can be applied to a chart, the study's script must be compiled. In process of compilation, the
correctness of code in the script is verified. If any errors are found, the compilation process stops, and the error is
highlighted. The results of the compilation, and errors if any, are displayed under the Build tab in the lower panel.
1. To compile the script in the active window: Click the Compile
426
2. To compile scripts of all opened studies: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Opened, or use the
Ctrl+Shift+F2 keyboard shortcut.
3. To compile any uncompiled scripts of all open studies: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Uncompiled.
4. To compile all scripts of all studies, stored on the computer: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Studies.
5. To compile indicators and signals only: Select Compile in the main menu and click All Indicators and Signals Only.
Protecting Studies
The script of a study can be password protected; script of a protected study can not be viewed without the password.
To protect a study:
1. Select Tools in the main menu, and click Protect Study.
2. In the Password Selection dialog box that appears, enter a password and click OK.
3. Reenter the password for confirmation, and click OK to password-protect the study's script.
Editor Overview
An integral part of the PowerLanguage programming environment, PowerLanguage Editor is a development tool for
creating and managing PowerLanguage studies.
Main functions of PowerLanguage Editor:
Creating studies
Importing and exporting studies
Protecting Studies
Editing the study code and settings
Editing data
Compiling studies
PowerLanguage Editor also features a built-in PowerLanguage keyword reference as well as keyword help hints.
To start PowerLanguage Editor:
click the Run PowerLanguage Editor
click the PowerLanguage Editor icon on the Quick Launch bar, or:
click the PowerLanguage Editor icon on the desktop.
Editor Settings
The appearance of the PowerLanguage Editor work area can be customized.
Navigator panel, Output panel, Toolbar, and Status bar can be hidden and redisplayed.
Study Window font, font size, and background color can be selected.
The color of each type of the EasyLanguage(R) code elements and line numbers can be individually selected.
Toolbars can also be hidden or redisplayed form the Editor Options window:
1. Open the Editor Options window.
To open the Editor Options window, select Tools in the main menu and click Editor Options.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Display section, clear or select the check box next to the name of the toolbar or panel to hide or redisplay
that toolbar or panel.
Note: Panels can also be hidden by clicking the Close button in the corner of the toolbar.
Setting Colors
Study Window background color, and colors of each type of the EasyLanguage(R) code elements and line numbers
can be selected individually.
The colors can be set from form the Editor Options window:
1. Open the Editor Options window.
To open the Editor Options window, select Tools in the main menu and click Editor Options.
2. Select the Colors tab.
3. In the Display Items list, select an EasyLanguage(R) code element (item).
4. In the Item Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors, or click the More Colors button to create custom
colors; repeat for steps 3 and 4 for any additional items.
5. In the Background Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors for the background, or click the More
Colors button to create custom colors.
6. In the Line Numbers Color palette box, select one of the standard 40 colors for the line numbers, or click the More
Colors button to create custom colors.
428
Navigator Panel
The navigator panel can display either a list of PowerLanguage keywords, or a list of available studies.
To toggle between the keyword dictionary mode and the studies list mode, click the Studies tab or the Dictionary
tab at the bottom of the navigator panel.
Dictionary Mode
A list of PowerLanguage keywords is displayed in the navigator panel.
To display the information for a particular keyword, click the keyword name in the list; the reference information
will be displayed in the Help tab of the output panel.
Note: Help information for a keyword can also be displayed in the Help tab of the output panel by placing the
cursor over the keyword in a study window and pressing the F1 key.
Studies Mode
Available studies are organized within three subfolders: Indicators, Signals, and Functions.
Additional folders can be created by right-clicking on a root folder or on any of the subfolders, selecting Add, and
then clicking New Folder. Studies can be moved between any of the folders.
Navigator panel can be displayed or hidden by clicking View in the main menu and then selecting or clearing the
Navigator Bar checkbox.
429
Importing Studies
In addition to MultiCharts native PLA (PowerLanguage Archive) format, studies in ELA, ELS, ELD, XML, and SEF
formats can be imported. Several studies can be imported simultaneously.
Note: Read-only studies in SEF (Source-compiled) format are imported using an Import Read-Only procedure.
2. The Select Files window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Import, or by
using the Ctrl+I keyboard shortcut.
2. Select one or more studies files; several files can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift keys while
making the selection, and all files can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut.
3. Click Open or double-click the selected file.
4. In the Import Studies window that appears, in the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or
Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies to be displayed in the list.
5. Select the studies to be imported by using the checkbox to the left of the study's name, or by double-clicking the
study's name; click Select All to select all studies, and Clear All to clear all selections.
430
6. At the bottom left of the Import Studies window, select the Compile on import checkbox to compile studies on
import; to learn more, see Compiling Studies.
7. Click OK to import the selected studies
Exporting Studies
Studies can be exported in XML or SEF (Read-only) formats.
2. The Export Studieswindow can also be opened by selecting Filein the main menu and clicking Export, or by using
the Ctrl+E keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be displayed in the list.
3. Select the studies to be exported by using the checkbox to the left of the studys name, or by double-clicking the
studys name; click Select Allto select all studies, and Clear Allto clear all selections.
4. At the bottom left of the Export Studies window, select the Select dependant function(s) checkbox to automatically
select the relevant functions.
5. Click OKto open the Exportwindow.
6. Select a path and choose the filename and type for the file to export the study or studies to, and click Save.
Importing and Exporting Studies
431
Creating Indicators
To create an indicator:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
Creating Signals
To create a signal:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
2. Select Signal.
3. Enter the signal name.
4. Click OK.
Creating Functions
To create a function:
1. Open New dialog box by clicking the New
icon on the toolbar, by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the Ctrl+O
keyboard shortcut.
Study List
The list of available studies, displayed in the Open window, can be set to include one or more of the following study
types: Indicators, Signals, and Functions. To select the study types to be listed, select or clear the appropriate
checkboxes in the Study Type section.
In the list, each study's name, type, status, and last modification date and time are displayed in the Name, Type,
Status, and Modified columns. The list can be sorted by any column, in ascending or descending order, by clicking
on the column header:
Name column displays the study's name.
Type column displays the study's type: Indicator, Signal, or Function.
Status column displays the study's status:
Compiled - the study is ready to be used; to learn more, see Compiling Studies
Protected - the study cannot be opened for editing, and the studys code cannot be
433
Opening Studies
To open a study:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the Ctrl+O
keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be included in the list.
3. Select one or more studies to be opened; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and Shift
keys while making the selection. All studies can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut, or by clicking any
studys name and then clicking Select All.
4. Click OK or double-click the selected study.
Saving Studies
To save a study in PowerLanguage Editor, click the Save
File in the main menu and clicking Save, or by using the Ctrl+S keyboard shortcut.
All studies, currently open in PowerLanguage editor, can be saved by selecting File in the main menu and clicking
Save All, or by using the Ctrl+Shift+S keyboard shortcut.
Note: If no modifications have been made to studies, the Save icon on the toolbar and Save commands will not be
available.
Renaming Studies
A study can be renamed by one of the following methods:
Click the Properties
icon on the toolbar; in the Properties tab of the Properties dialog box that appears,
in the Name box, enter the new study name and click OK.
Right-click within the studys window and then click Properties; in the Properties tab of the Properties dialog
box that appears, in the Name box, enter the new study name and click OK.
Select File in the main menu and click Save As; in the dialog box that appears, enter the new study name and
click OK.
A study can also be renamed from the Open window. To rename a study from the Open window:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using the
Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of studies
to be included in the list.
3. Right-click the study to be renamed, and then click Edit.
434
4. In the Properties tab of the Properties dialog box that appears, in the Name box, enter the new study name and
click OK.
Closing Studies
A study can be closed by one of the following methods:
Click the Close icon on the study's title bar.
Right-click on the study's window tab, and then click Close.
Select File in the main menu and click Close.
Use the Alt+F4 keyboard shortcut.
Deleting Studies
To delete a study:
1. Open the Open window.
To open the Open window:
1. Click the Open
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using
the Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of
studies to be included in the list.
3. Select one or more studies to be deleted; several studies can be selected at once by holding down Ctrl or/and
Shift keys while making the selection. All studies can be selected by using the Ctrl+A keyboard shortcut, or by
clicking any studys name and then clicking Select All.
4. Press the Delete key on the keyboard, or right-click the study to be deleted, and then click Delete.
2. The Open window can also be opened by selecting File in the main menu and clicking Open, or by using
the Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut.
2. In the Study Type section, select or clear Indicator, Signal, and/or Function checkboxes to specify the types of
studies to be included in the list.
3. Right-click the study, the properties of which are to be edited, and then click Edit.
435
Portfolio Backtester
Backtesting a Portfolio
Once a portfolio has been created, strategy configured, and portfolio settings selected, the portfolio can be
backtested.
To backtest a portfolio:
Select Portfolio in the main menu and then select Run Backtesting.
Backtesting a portfolio will generate a Portfolio Performance Report that will be displayed in a separate window.
The description for each performance measure is described in the Report.
Configuring Strategies
Understanding Strategies
A strategy is a set of signals, applied to a chart. Signals systematically specify market entry or exit points according
to a set of trading rules implemented in the signals' algorithms, and can be viewed as the basic building blocks of
strategies.
Over 100 pre-built, customizable signals, covering the most popular trading concepts, are already included with the
platform, and additional signals can be imported from a variety of sources.
Signals can be fully customized, or entirely new signals created, using PowerLanguage scripting in PowerLanguage
Editor.
A portfolio can contain several strategies.
Each strategy can have its own list of symbols and signals. It is possible apply different strategies to different sets of
symbols.
Basic adjustments to a signal's logic can be made by simply changing the Input Values. Signals can have one or more
inputs, or none at all. Multiple instances of the same signal can be used in the same strategy, and each instance can
have different input settings.
Strategies can be constructed by simply combining a number of signals.
Signal settings are specific to each particular signal, while Strategy Properties regulate the actions of a group of
signals as a whole.
436
Adding Strategies
To add a strategy to a portfolio:
1.
2.
Cloning Strategies
To clone a strategy right-click on the strategy and click Clone Strategy.
Adding Signals
The number of signals that can be added to a portfolio is limited only by your computer's hardware configuration.
To add a signal to a portfolio:
1.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select OK.
You can also drag and drop signals from one strategy to another.
Note: Only the compiled (those with the Ready Status of Yes) signals can be inserted. To learn more see Compiling
Studies
Removing Signals
To remove a signal:
1.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Signals List
To see which signals are applied to a portfolio:
437
1.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
Note: Signals' execution priority is assigned according to the order in which they appear in the Signals List, with the
signals at the top of the list having a higher priority. To view the available input parameters of a particular signal
1.
2.
Select Format Signal. The Format Signals window will appear. The table will show available inputs.
3.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input to be changed and enter the desired value.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
One of the main advantages of using the inputs is that basic adjustments to the study's logic can be made by simply
changing the input values, without the need to edit the studies' actual code.
Multiple instances of the same signal can be used in the same strategy, and can have different input settings.
Inputs are also used for Trading Strategy Optimization.
To change a signal's inputs:
1.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
Select Format Signal. The Format Signals window will appear. The table will show available inputs.
4.
In the Value column, click on the value of the input to be changed and enter the desired value.
Strategy Properties
Strategy properties are separate from the individual signals' settings, affect all of the signals in a strategy, and
regulate the actions of a group of signals as a whole.
Strategy properties include Costs/Capitalization, Maximum bars back, Position limits, and Trade size sections.
Costs/Capitalization
To change costs or/and capitalization assumptions:
1.
2.
Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio
Tree.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter the commission dollar amount in the Commission textbox, and:
Select per Trade to specify that the dollar amount entered represents commission per trade, or
Select per Share/Contract to specify that the dollar amount entered represents commission per
share/contract
6.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter the slippage dollar amount in the Slippage textbox, and:
Select per Trade to specify that the dollar amount entered represents slippage per trade, or
Select per Share/Contract to specify that the dollar amount entered represents slippage per
share/contract
7.
In the Interest Rate textbox, enter the interest rate, to be used in performance ratio calculations.
3.
4.
5.
In the Costs/Capitalization section, enter a number in the Maximum number of bars study will reference
textbox.
Position Limits
Position Limits settings control the maximum number entry orders in the same direction and the maximum number
of shares/contracts per position.
To enter position limits:
1. Open Portfolio Tree window To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2. Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Position Limits section, select the check box to enable order limits in the same direction.
6.
Enter the number of entry orders permitted in the same direction into the textbox.
Select when the order is generated by a different entry order radio button to apply the entry
order limit only when the entry orders originated from different signals, or
Select regardless of the entry that generated the order radio button to apply the entry order
limit regardless of whether the entry orders originated from the same or different signals.
7.
In the Maximum shares/contracts per position textbox, enter the maximum shares/contracts permitted.
Trade Size
Trade size settings set the size of each trade, either by the number shares/contracts or by currency value.
Trade size settings select the number shares/contracts or the currency value per each trade.
Note: These settings are ignored if trade size is specified by the signal.
To enter the trade size:
1. Open Portfolio Tree window
To open the Portfolio Tree window:
1. Go to Portfolio Backtester application.
2. Under the main menu click View and then select Portfolio Tree.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operating Portfolios
Portfolios can be created by the MultiCharts Portfolio Backtester.
MultiCharts Portfolio Backtester is included with the MultiCharts platform as a separate application.
Select the Portfolio Backtester icon on the computer's desktop or on the Quick Launch bar, or:
2.
Creating Portfolios
To create a new Portfolio:
1.
2.
Select File in the main menu and then select New Portfolio, or
3.
Saving Portfolios
A Portfolio, complete with the strategy and all settings, is saved as a file with a .pws extension.
To save a Portfolio:
Select File in the main menu and then click Save Portfolio, or
To save an already named Portfolio under a new name, select File in the main menu and select Save Portfolio As.
Select File in the main menu and then click Load Portfolio, or
2.
3.
Renaming Portfolios
Portfolios can be renamed by two different methods:
Save a copy of the Portfolio under a different name (see Saving Portfolios) or,
Use Windows Explorer or another program to rename a Portfolio file as you would any other Windows file.
Deleting Portfolios
Use Windows Explorer or another program to delete the Portfolio file as you would any other Windows file.
2.
Double-click the cell, and then click the http://www.multicharts. com/ img/wiki/portfolio/ellipse.gif button,
or
3.
Select a data feed from the Data Source drop-down list box.
4.
Select a symbol from the list of available symbols in the All Symbols tab, or use the category tabs to list only a
If the symbol isn't in the list, please see Adding Symbols to Symbol List for more information.
Selecting Multiple Symbols
Multiple symbols can be selected in the Select Symbol window and added to the Symbol List.
New rows will be automatically inserted in to the table.
To select a group of adjacent symbols:
1.
2.
While holding the SHIFT key, select the symbol on the other end of the group. The entire group will be selected.
2.
To cancel the selection, hold down the CTRL key and select the symbol again.
5.
Symbols can also be entered directly into each cell. Symbols are already in the QuoteManager database will show
up in blue.
Unrecognized symbols will show up in red, indicating that they must to be added to the Symbol List.
insert a row,
1.
Right-click on the Data1 cell in the row above which the new row is to be inserted.
2.
A symbol can be copied from a cell using the CTRL+C keyboard shortcut, and pasted to a cell using CTRL+V keyboard
shortcut.
The symbol can also be pasted to all cells of a column. To paste a symbol to all sells of a column, select the entire
column by clicking the column header, and then paste the symbol to any of the selected cells.
Global Settings
Global settings consist of the Data Range and Time Zone settings.
To access global settings, select the Data tab in the main window.
Data Range
To backtest based on # of bars back or days back:
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the From field, enter the date from which Bars Back or Days Back will start counting.
2.
2.
Double-click the cell, and then click the http:/ / www. multicharts. com/ img/ wiki/ portfolio/ ellipse. gif
button, or
3.
Resolution
Resolution can be based on a Time interval (seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years), or on a Count
interval (tick, volume, change, or range). To set resolution,
1.
In the Resolution textbox, enter the number units for each bar.
2.
1.
2.
To perform backtesting using only the locally stored historical data, clear the Download data before backtesting
checkbox.
Portfolio Optimization
Understanding Optimization
A strategy is created by implementing trading concepts, ideas, and observations of historical market behavior, into
a trading system. The very idea of a trading system implies a degree of optimization to market behavior.
The process of strategy optimization further enhances and automates this process. Strategy optimization is the
search for the set of optimum parameters for the defined criteria. By testing a range of signal input values,
optimization aids in selecting the values that correspond, based on historical data, to the best strategy performance.
Optimization aids in better understanding of strategy's characteristics and in creating new criteria for entries and
exits.
Optimization can have detrimental effects if the user searches for the combination of inputs based solely on the
best performance over a period of historical data and focuses to much on market conditions that may never occur
again. This approach is known as over-optimization or curve-fitting. Performance will not be the same in real trading,
since historical patterns are highly unlikely to be repeated.
Optimization Methods
There are two optimization methods: Exhaustive Search and Genetic Algorithm.
Exhaustive, also called Brute-Force, optimization systematically goes through all the potential combinations in
search for the best solution. The length of time required is proportional to the total number of all possible solutions.
Unless relatively few parameters are involved, the period of time required to reach a solution by this method may
turn out to be unacceptably long. Thus, exhaustive optimization may only be suitable when there is a limited number
of possible solutions.
Genetic Algorithms optimization evaluates only the more promising combinations, finding near-optimum solutions
in a fraction of time that would be required by the brute-force approach, making Genetic Algorithm optimization
powerful enough to analyze strategies with hundreds of parameters. Genetic Optimizer settings add flexibility to
this technique.
To learn more about optimization techniques, see Understanding Optimization
Running Portfolio Optimization
Once a portfolio has been created, strategy configured, and portfolio settings selected, portfolio optimization can
be run.
445
1.
button on the toolbar, or select Portfolio in the main menu and then click Run
Optimization.
2.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Exhaustive Search.
3.
In the Exhaustive Search Properties window that appears, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
4.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
5.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
6.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
7.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
8.
In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
9.
The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
button on the toolbar, or select Portfolio in the main menu and then click Run
Optimization.
2.
In the Select Optimization Method dialog box that appears, select Genetic Algorithm.
3.
In the Genetic Algorithm Properties window that appears, select the Optimizable Inputs tab.
4.
Check/uncheck the check box to the left of the signal name and input name to enable/disable optimization for
this input or check the check box to the left of the Signal Name column heading to enable optimization for all inputs
( at least one input should be selected to perform optimization ).
5.
The Current Value column shows input values that are currently selected for the signals applied on the chart.
6.
In the Start Value column, enter the desired starting values for each of the inputs.
7.
In the End Value column, enter the desired ending values for each of the inputs.
8.
In the Step column, enter the desired step size, for each of the inputs.
9.
The Step Count column shows current amount of steps for an input.
15. Optimization dialogue window shows Average fitness value for current population during optimization.
Select the most significant sort criterion in the Sort by list box at the top left of the report window, and then
Select the second most significant sort criterion in the Then by list box at the top center of the report window,
Select the least significant sort criterion in the Then by list box at the top right of the report window, and then
2.
In the dialog box that appears, click Yes to apply the input combination, or click No to cancel.
Note: Once a new inputs combination is applied to the strategy, the portfolio will have to be backtested again.
3D Optimization Charts
3D Optimization Chart is a visual representation of how the strategy's parameters affect its trading performance.
The 3D graph reveals the most robust parameter zones, and is a great tool for avoiding over-optimization (curvefitting ). Robust parameter zones will appear to have gradual, rather then abrupt changes in the surface plot. Overoptimized zones will appear to have radical changes or spikes in the surface plot.
To view the 3D Optimization Chart, click the View 3D Optimization Chart
window.
A 3D Chart will be displayed in the 3D Optimization Charts window.
Click the Export button at the bottom left of the of the report window.
447
2.
In the Save Strategy Optimization Report As dialog box that appears, navigate to the desired location, enter
Breakdown by Symbols
The Breakdown by Symbols category shows the performance of each symbol in the portfolio.
The Overview node shows the net profit and total number of trades of each symbol.
The Ratios node shows the performance ratios of each symbol. The ratios available are Upside Potential, Sharpe
Ratio, Sortino Ratio, Fouse Ratio, Calmar Ratio, Sterling Ratio, Avg. win / Avg. loss, Profit Factor, and Percent
Profitable.
The Equity Curve Analysis node shows equity curve statistics for each symbol.
The performance statistics available are Maximum Equity Drawdown, Maximum Equity Run-up, Avg. Monthly
Return, and Standard Deviation of Returns.
Correlation Analysis
The Correlation Analysis category shows the equity correlation among the symbols in the portfolio.
The Based on Daily Equity node shows the daily equity correlation of the symbols in the portfolio.
The Based on Monthly Equity node shows the monthly equity correlation of the symbols in the portfolio. The
Based on Annual Equity node shows the annual equity correlation of the symbols in the portfolio.
The description for each performance measure is described in the report.
To show the description of the performance measure,
1.
Hover the mouse pointer over the name of the performance measure.
pointer.
Click on the name. The description will appear on the bottom of the report.
For a more information on using performance reports, see Using Performance Report.
448
Portfolio Settings
Portfolio settings define the conditions under which the strategy is executed. Portfolio Settings include Exposure,
Max % of Capital at Risk per Position, Initial Portfolio Capital, Margin per Contract and Potential Loss per Contract.
Portfolio Settings can be set from the Portfolio Settings tab in Portfolio Backtester application.
To use the Portfolio Settings tab:
1.
2.
In the Exposure box, enter the maximum percentage of capital to be exposed to risk.
For example, with Exposure set to 50%, a maximum of 50% of the capital will be available for the sum of all positions.
If an additional position causes total exposure to exceed 50%, the position size will be reduced so that the Exposure
limit is not exceeded.
Exposure is defined as follows: entry price * number of contracts. This is the definition for both long and short
positions.
3.
In the Max % of Capital at Risk per Position box, enter the maximum percentage of capital that can be risked
per position.
For example, with Max % of Capital at Risk per Position set to 5%, a maximum of 5% of the capital will be available
for a single position. If an additional position risks more than 5% of capital, then the position size will be reduced so
that the Max % of Capital at Risk per Position limit is not exceeded.
Max % of Capital at Risk per Position is defined as follows: entry price * number of shares. This is the definition for
both long and short positions.
Note: Max % of Capital at Risk per Position cannot exceed the Exposure setting.
4.
In the Initial Portfolio Capital box, enter the amount of the initial trading capital.
5.
In the Required Capital Assumptions in Margin Trading section, choose to use either Margin per Contract
Select Absolute Margin value (from QuoteManager symbol settings) to get the margin value from
QuoteManager. Each symbol has a margin setting in QuoteManager. If no margin setting was entered in the
QuoteManager symbol settings, then the margin value is assumed to be zero, or
Select the Margin value % of contract cost radio button to enter a margin percentage that will be applied to
all contrats.
2.
In the Potential Loss per Contract section, input 0.001 into the Absolute Max Potential Loss box. This
1.
Select Absolute Max Potential Loss to enter the max potential loss in absolute dollars, or
Select Max Potential Loss to enter the max potential loss in percentages.
2.
In the Margin per Contract section, set Margin value % of contract cost to "0". This effectively disables the
Portfolio strategies can maximize profit and minimize risks by allocating the capital within a portfolio
Portfolio strategies can enter, scale-in, scale-out, or exit positions based on the overall portfolio performance
Portfolio strategies are generally more robust and less susceptible to over-optimization
Capital limits
Portfolio Backtesting
Portfolio backtesting offers a number of advantages:
Backtesting a strategy on a single instrument may not produce enough trades to distinguish a pattern from a
coincidence
Backtesting a strategy on a number of instruments is more likely to reveal any shortcomings and helps to avoid
over-optimization
By backtesting on a diverse portfolio, the instruments most suitable for the particular trading strategy can be
selected
450
Batch Portfolio Backtesting, also known as Basket Backtesting, evaluates each strategy separately and then compiles
the results.
Understanding Portfolio Backtesting
True Dynamic Portfolio Backtesting simulates the actions of a real trader by taking in to account the overall portfolio
considerations dynamically, during the evaluation of each bar.
Portfolio equity and the available capital are dynamically evaluated for every instrument, on every bar, in order to
determine the amount available to be invested.
When available capital is insufficient to enter all of the trading opportunities that arise simultaneously, the best
opportunities are selected according to user-customizable criteria.
In addition to the performance of a particular instrument, portfolio drawdown or other portfolio performance
aspects can be taken in to consideration when making entry and exit decisions.
Symbol Prioritization
451
If PortfolioEntriesPriority function is specified within a strategy, the sequence of the order sets is rearranged based
on the criteria specified.
This process is illustrated in the Symbol Prioritization section of the diagram: the resulting sequence of order sets
begins with the order set for the symbol 1, followed by the order set for symbol N, and ends with the order set for
symbol 2.
The position of a set of orders in the sequence determines its relative priority: the set of orders for symbol 1 has the
highest priority (3), set of orders for symbol N has the second highest priority (2), and the set of orders for symbol 2
has the least priority (3).
Understanding Portfolio Backtesting
Risk Control
At the risk control stage, the sequence of order sets is treated as one long sequence of orders. The orders are
executed one-by-one from the beginning of the sequence, until all orders are executed, or until the risk control limits
defined in Portfolio Settings of the Portfolio Backtester prevent the execution of remaining orders. Any remaining
orders that could not be executed are discarded.
This process is illustrated in the Risk Control section of the diagram: all of the orders for symbol 1 and symbol N
are executed, while only some of the orders for symbol 2, 100 shares Long @ 55, are executed, due to risk control
limits preventing the execution of the rest of the orders for symbol 2.
The entire process is repeated for the next bar of each of the portfolio symbol's data series.
452
FAQ
MultiCharts must be run with Administrator
Priviliges in order to register a new Data Feed
In order to remove this popping up on every start alert, 3 steps must be taken:
1. Go to Windows Start -> Control Panel -> Programs and Features/Uninstall a program/Add or remove
programs -> Make sure you have Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 installed. If it is not in the list, please download it
from Microsoft page and install it.
2.
Make sure MultiCharts products are closed and there are no MultiCharts Processes running.
3.
After this the red alert should not appear anymore. All next sessions of MultiCharts can be launched "not as
Administrator", but by regular double-click.
Historical data from GlobalServer can be stored locally if the box is checked in the data source settings.
MetaStock
*
Historical data from TradeStation can be stored locally if the box is checked in the data source settings.
When data is imported from ASCII file, it is always stored in MultiCharts database.
453
RT data plotted in Market Scanner window is saved the same way as data plotted in Chart window.
RT data plotted in Time & Sales Window is saved the same way as data plotted in Chart window.
RT data plotted in Chart window is stored or is not stored, depending on its type:
Minute and daily are recorded or not recorded for each data vendor individually:
Note: If a data source provides only real-time data (no historical backfill) it is always recorded in MultiCharts
database. Only the data vendors, supporting both history and real-time feed are listed in the following table.
Data Vendor
RT minutes
RT minutes
RT daily
RT daily
Barchart
Bloomberg
CGQ
eSignal
Interactive
IQFeed
LMAX
MB Trading
Open E Cry
V*!
PFG BEST
Quik
Thomson
TradeStation
Zen-Fire
Brokers
Reuters
V*! - Open E Cry data source provides real-time minute data that is stored in database. It is important to know that
if charts only with minute data from Open E Cry are plotted in MultiCharts, tick data is not stored locally.
454
Note: Take into account that Download Missing Historical Data checkbox affects the way MultiCharts treats
received real-time data for Chart and Market Scanner windows.
Note 2: If a data vendor does not provide historical Ask/Bid data, than Ask/Bid data received in real-time is recorded
in MultiCharts database.
Compilation Error (errLine 0, errColumn 0, errLineEnd 0, errColumnEnd 0)
In PowerLanguage Editor main menu go to File, then New... and in the pop up window choose any study type.
2.
3.
Without putting a single keyword into the completely empty study, click on the Compile button in the ToolBar
of PowerLanguage Editor.
4.
If the fresh blank study is compiled with error, it means that you have one of two compilation problems.
Depending on which type of compilation problem you have there are two ways to fix them. To find out which one
you have:
1.
2.
"C:\PROGRA~1\TS Support\MultiCharts\make\MinGW\bin\dllwrap.exe"
"C:\PROGRA~1\TS Support\MultiCharts\make\MinGW\bin\dlltool exited with status 1"
It means that this is the issue with GCC short paths.
Close all MultiCharts products and make sure all MultiCharts Processes are finished in Windows Task Manager.
455
2.
Download the following zip archive onto your machine and unpack it.
has
detected
that
NtfsDisable8dot3NameCreation
registry key
in
Close all MultiCharts products and make sure all MultiCharts Processes are finished in Windows Task Manager.
2.
Click on Windows Start button, then Run and type Regeidit. Press Enter.
3.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\FileSystem
4.
5.
6.
Open the compiler_error.log file. Depending on what path is written in the file you will have to rename several
C:\ProgramData\TS
Support\...
(example
for
Windows
7/8);
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
1.
Rename the TS Support folder into TS SupportOld. Create new folder TS Support. Move everything from TS
Open the new TS Support folder. Rename the MultiCharts folder into MultiChartsOld. Create new folder
MultiCharts. Move everything from MultiChartsOld into the new MultiCharts. Delete the MultiChartsOld folder.
3.
Open the new MultiCharts folder. Rename the StudyServer folder into StudyServerOld. Create new folder
StudyServer. Move everything from StudyServerOld into the new StudyServer. Delete the StudyServerOld folder.
Run PowerLanguage, create new study (any type) and try to compile it. Should be compiled without any errors. If
the issue persists, please contact our support team in [Chat [1]].
456
Add current contract + distant (expired) contracts for this year if required.Example: Today's date is 06.10.11;
the last date in your file is 04.10.11 (all dd.mm.yy); CLU1 (September contact) should be added because the last date
you have is before the date of expiration of CLV1 (October contract).
2.
Import all data from the file into CLU1, but not after its expiration date, so several days of minute data are not
imported. It is recommended to import any data after the date of expiration: for CLU1 you should not import
anything after its expiration on 22.08.11.
3.
In MultiCharts Main Menu please go to File, then click on Preferences and select Data Server Mode tab. Check
Close all MC products and make sure all MultiCharts Processes are off.
5.
Open MultiCharts; select Offline Mode; plot CLU1 chart: 1 day resolition, using the whole data range of data
In MultiCharts please go to File and click Export data to export daily data from the chart.
7.
Open QuoteManager and import this daily data to the CLU1 instrument (see Importing ASCII data.
8.
Editing an existing symbol properties|Rename the CLV1 to CLV2011 ( for example). It should be made not to
request data from data source, so the imported data (both daily and minutes) is not replaced with data from server
when you reload your chart.
9.
Note: Sometimes a customer can face a problem when the expiration rule doesn't coincide with expiration dates
of individual contracts, so we recommend to change rollover dates when you create custom futures for 1-2 days, so
those 1-2 days of data will be taken from distant contract, not from the current one. It will help you to avoid gaps
on your chart.
10. Close all MC products and make sure all MultiCharts Processes are off.
11. Open MultiCharts; select Online Mode and check the Download Missing Historical Data box; plot the Custom
Futures on chart.
Now you can plot both minute and daily based charts. You will have your data from ASCII that wont be replace; no
gaps after the last date in your file which have been filled by your data vendor; real-time data from your data source.
Custom Criteria Optimization
457
1.
Write custom criteria in java on the Optimization Criteria tab of the Exhaustive Search Properties window or
on the Algorithm-Specific Properties tab of the Genetic Algorith Properties window (see Performing
Optimization) ; or :
2.
Create a custom signal using SetCustomFitnessValue keyword in PowerLanguage Editor specifying your
custom criteria.
Example: You want to optimize your signal by Sharpe Ratio. This parameter is not among standard criteria.
One possible solution would be to create a function which calculates SharpeRatio in Power Language (see default
SharpeRatio function) and use it as a SetCustomFitnessValue keyword parameter. See the ! optimize by sharp ratio
! default signal as an example. Such signal should be applied to your chart with the signals that you want to optimize
applied before performing optimization.
Make sure that you select the Custom Fitness Value from the list under the Standard Criteria section on the
Optimization Criteria tab of the Exhaustive Search Properties window or on the Algorithm-Specific Properties tab
of the Genetic Algorith Properties window (see Performing Optimization).
Note: !optimize by sarp ratio! default signal can be used as an example showing how to find the best parameters
using custom criteria.
One of the data feeds that is used on your workspaces is disabled in QuoteManager->Tools->Data sources.
Make sure that data feeds you are using are Active.
2.
On one of the charts on your workspace the data feed that is disabled in the QuoteManager is used. Close this
During MultiCharts installation not all of the data feed DLLs have been installed due to antivirus/firewall
activity. Please close MultiCharts and all of its products. Make sure all processes [1] are finished. Then go to
MultiCharts folder (make a right click on the MultiCharts shortcut > Properties > "Shortcut" tab > select
"open file location") and run DataUpdater.exe
Floating-Point Division by Zero Error Message
Examples
var: vrs(0); if vrs=0 then raiseruntimeerror("!!!alarm vrs=0");
if vrs<>0 then
plot1(close/vrs) else
plot1(0);
2.
Select Preferences;
3.
On the Workspaces tab under Wizard Options section check/uncheck Run Wizard on Startup feature;
4.
Global Variables
Global Variables
Understanding Global Variables
Global Variables is an external .dll file that can be used to pass values between strategies on separate charts and
third party applications. The information is stored in a shared memory space. External processes can access the data
in the memory for further operations. From Multicharts the Global Variables functionality is accessed by
PowerLanguage functions. When a customer uses Global Variables it is important to determine the read-write action
time because the actions are performed on the script calculation.
Global variables can be used in backtesting only in Portfolio Backtester: http://www. multicharts.com/tradingsoftware/index.php/Spread_and_Pair_Trading#Pair_Trading_in_Backtesting
When a customer goes to Help in MultiCharts main menu and then click on About MultiCharts... it may display an
error message. Resolution of the issue is simple: the customer should go to Microsoft web page to download latest
available for your operation system version of Internet Explorer. Its components are used in some parts of
MultiCharts software. After fresh IE is installed the issue should be fixed. If it is not, contact MultiCharts support
team.
The script is calculated on the bar close. Order is placed on this bar close/ next bar open. Order is filled on any tick
price within the next bar.
The script is calculated tick by tick. Order is placed on the next tick. Order is filled on any tick price within the bar.
Calculation on historical data. Regular mode (IOG disabled. Bar Magnifier disabled)
The script is calculated on the bar close. It is considered that all prices were within the bar (Intra-bar Price movement
assumption is used) . Order is filled on any price within the bar.
The script is calculated four times on OHLC of the bar. It is considered that all prices were within the bar (Intra-bar
Price Movement Assumption is used). Order is filled on any price within the bar with the step (minmove/pricescale).
The script is calculated 1 time on main data series close. It is considered that there were only OHLC values of the
detailed data series. Order is filled only on OHLC prices of the detailed data series.
The script is calculated on the Open value of the main data series, then OHLC of each bar of the detailed data series
selected in bar magnifier, then on the Close of the main data series. Order is filled only on these O (main) -OHLC (
detailed) -C (main) values.
Note: IOG and Bar Magnifier work differently on non-standard chart types. Refer to this article for more details IOG
and Bar Magnifier on non-standard chart types
Note: Why is Data Playback strategy performance different from Backtesting results?
460
2.
Select Run
3.
Support\MultiCharts ;
For Windows XP paste the following command: %allusersprofile%\Application Data\TS Support\MultiCharts
4.
Press Enter.
5.
In the popped up window make a copy of the DataBase folder with all its contents.
Note: MultiCharts 32 bit databases are incompatible with MultiCharts 64 bit. Copying a 32 bit database folder into
MultiCharts 64 bit will cause errors. Please use the next step Export data to export your databases from
MultiCharts 32 bit version or use the following tool to convert your 32 bit data bases into 64 bit format: How to
Reduce Database Size
To export data:
1.
Open QuoteManager:
In MultiCharts main menu select File, then point to New and click QuoteManager Window
2.
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Export Data and click Export All Instruments ;or Click
3.
In the Export window make sure that the Export symbols with settings, no data check box is unchecked.
4.
Click Next
5.
Enter the name of the *.qmd file and choose the path where it will be located.
6.
Click Next
7.
Click Finish.
Saving Workspaces
See Saving Workspaces
2.
Select Run.
3.
Paste a command (same for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 and XP) %userprofile%\Application Data\TS
Support\MultiCharts
461
4.
5.
2.
3.
Select Run
4.
Support\MultiCharts ;
For Windows XP paste the following command: %allusersprofile%\Application Data\TS Support\MultiCharts
5.
Press Enter.
6.
Copy the DataBase folder with all its contents to the popped up window.
To import data:
1.
Open QuoteManager:
In MultiCharts main menu select File, then point to New and click QuoteManager Window.
2.
In QuoteManager main menu select File, then point to Import Data and click Import Instruments ;or:
3.
4.
Click Next.
5.
Click Finish.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Enter the same command for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 and XP: %userprofile%\Application
Data\TS Support\MultiCharts
4.
Go to http:/ / www. microsoft. com/ en-us/ download/ details. aspx?id=26798 and download Debug Diagnostic
Tool.
462
2.
After you have downloaded DebugDiag.msi and installed on your computer, go to Windows Start menu -> All
On first start of the application you will see the active "Select Rule Type" dialogue. Cancel it.
4.
Go to "Processes" tab.
5.
Under this tab you should find the reqired process, right click on it -> create Mini Userdump
6.
Now
you
need
to
go
to
C:\Program
Files\DebugDiag\Logs\Misc
(or
C:\Program
Files
or the
Green Authorization
Button in the bottom right corner of the MultiCharts window and click Proxy Settings.
You may need to ask your IT specialist about the proxy settings. Follow the instructions very carefully.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Socket port should be set to 7496 (by default); 5. ClientID should be set to 0 (or empty by default);
6. Click OK.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Edit;
6.
Make sure that the Port and ClientID settings are the same as in the 1st IB TWS platform settings.
463
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Socket port should differ from the 1st IB TWS settings. It can be set to 7497 (or any other number different
ClientID should be set to 1 (or any other number different from the 1st IB TWS ClientID ) ;
6.
Click OK.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click New;
5.
6.
ClientID - 1).
7.
Click OK.
8.
The new (the second) broker profile will be named "Interactive Brokers 2" by default. This name can be changed
Note: When a customer is subscribed to regular MCFX platform he has MCFX login and password. The login and
password cannot be used to get data into MultiCharts after required module is installed.
We provide MultiCharts Forex Data (up to 10 years of FXCM tick data: asks and bids) for $99 per month. Here is the
link to subscribe to Forex Data (MCFX data for MultiCharts)
Note: We provide data for the following key currency pairs: AUD/CAD, AUD/JPY, AUD/NZD, AUD/USD,
CAD/JPY, CHF/JPY, EUR/AUD, EUR/CAD, EUR/CHF, EUR/GBP, EUR/JPY, EUR/NZD, EUR/TRY, EUR/USD,
GBP/AUD, GBP/CHF, GBP/JPY, GBP/USD, NOK/JPY, NZD/CAD, NZD/CHF, NZD/JPY, NZD/USD, SEK/JPY, USD/CAD,
USD/CHF, USD/HKD, USD/JPY, USD/NOK, USD/SEK, USD/SGD, USD/TRY, USD/ZAR.
This subscription is separate from MC license. MCFX data feed is not installed automatically with MultiCharts. If you
have MultiCharts, but you don't have MCFX login and password, you can signup for MCFX or contact our support
team in live chat to get 2 weeks of trial for free.
How to Get Data from FXCM (MCFX data feed) and Set Up for Trading on FXCM
Make sure you have MultiCharts 8.0 Release. Both 32-bit and 64-bit versions can be downloaded here
2.
3.
4.
Run QuoteManager and set up the MCFX data feed with your MCFX login and password
5.
DO NOT add any symbols from MCFX data source. Please close the QuoteManager and make sure all
Run QuoteManager and add the symbols from MCFX data source
7.
How to set up MultiCharts for trading from MCFX charts on your FXCM account
1.
To establish connection to FXCM broker follow this instruction: FXCM Broker Profile
Note: PAMM accounts are supported: only 1 account is visible and trades can be successfully executed. The final
profit/loss should be allocated to any other subaccount on FXCM end.
2.
Configure symbol mapping manually as it is described at the bottom of the symbol mapping instruction:
Symbol Mapping
Note: To edit a broker symbol click the Edit button on the right side of the Broker Symbol column.
If everything is done correctly, you will be able to trade on FXCM using MCFX data in MultiCharts.
465
Please close MultiCharts and all its applications (QuoteManager, PowerLanguage Editor, Portfolio Backtester
Run Windows Task Manager (rigth-click on windows clock -> run Task Manager) and make sure that all
MultiCharts Processes are ended. If a process of MultiCharts is still there after 20 seconds, end it manually.
3.
Unzip the archive. Then run the Updater.exe and click on the Update button.
4.
Scroll up log of the updater to make sure there are no errors. If there is is an error, contact MultiCharts support
team.
5.
Close the updater. An issue should be fixed or additional functional should be enabled. MultiCharts can be
launched.
First of all base the calculation of the studies on the same amount of bars.
1.
2.
If the signal is calculated tick by tick, i.e. IOG is enabled for the signal, the Update on every tick feature should
1.
2.
Select Studies;
3.
4.
5.
6.
Realtime-History Matching should be enabled/disabled (upon necessity) for both signal and indicator. Please
If indicator and signal settings are the same - the calculation results should be equal.
467
Protected *.sef files from any 7.X version of MultiCharts cannot be used in any 8.X version of MultiCharts.
Only .sef studies created with the same version number (build) of MultiCharts can be imported in this case. If
a .sef file is compiled in a different build of MultiCharts it won't be imported.
If you upgrade from MultiCharts 8.0 to MultiCharts 8.1/8.2/8.X, the studies can be imported without
recompilation.
Transferring Database files
1.
Close MultiCharts and all of its processes (see the list of all processes here [1]) ;
2.
3.
Convert your database from 32 bit to 64 bit. Please see How to Reduce Database Size article for detailed
instructions;
4.
5.
6.
Select Run;
7.
Support\MultiCharts64 ;
8.
;
9.
Press Enter;
10. Paste the copied converted DataBase folder with all its contents to the popped up window to replace new 64
bit database with your old converted one.
11. Run the Dataupdater.exe in the installation folder of MultiCharts 64 bit.
Note: All the data in 64 bit database will not be available after database file replacement.
Transferring Workspaces
MultiCharts 64 bit can use workspaces saved in MultiCharts 32 bit. To transfer workspaces save them in MultiCharts
32 bit (see Saving Workspaces) and open them in MultiCharts 64 bit.
Transferring Custom Study Templates To
save Custom Study Template:
1.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Paste a command (same for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 and XP) %userprofile%\Application Data\TS
Support\MultiCharts
4.
5.
Paste a command (same for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 and XP) %userprofile%\Application Data\TS
Support\MultiCharts64
6.
Paste *.tml files that you previously copied into the popped-up folder.
468
Database files
Before starting, it is recommended to backup the database (see How to Backup User Data) . The first step is to copy
the files themselves:
Note: See How to Reduce Database Size to fill less space on another drive before moving the database files.
1.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Support\MultiCharts ;
Note:
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 64 bit database is %allusersprofile%\TS Support\MultiCharts64;
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 32 bit database is %allusersprofile%\TS Support\MultiCharts;
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts .NET 64 bit database is %allusersprofile%\TS Support\MultiCharts
.Net64;
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts .NET 32 bit database is %allusersprofile%\TS Support\MultiCharts .Net
For Windows XP paste the following command: %allusersprofile%\Application Data\TS Support\MultiCharts
4.
Press Enter.
5.
In the popped up window make a copy of the Database folder with all its contents.
6.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Type regedit.
4.
Press Enter.
5.
Find the Path registry key On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 64 bit databases key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Portfolio
On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 32 bit databases key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Portfolio
6.
7.
Find the Path and CashePath registry keys On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 64 bit key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Storage
On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 32 bit key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Storage
469
8.
9.
Find the DictionaryPath registry key On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 64 bit databases key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Portfolio
On 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 32 bit databases key is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\TS Support\MultiCharts\Databases\Portfolio
10. Change the path to new location of your database files.
Studies
Before starting, it is recommended to backup the studies (see How to Backup User Data) . The first step is to copy
the files themselves:
1.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Support\MultiCharts\StudyServer;
Note:
For
64
bit
Windows
the
path
to
MultiCharts
64
bit
studies
is
%allusersprofile%\TS
to
MultiCharts
32
bit
studies
is
%allusersprofile%\TS
Support\MultiCharts64\StudyServer;
For
64
bit
Windows
the
path
Support\MultiCharts\StudyServer;
For Windows
XP
paste
the
following
command:
%allusersprofile%\Application
Data\TS Support\MultiCharts\StudyServer
4.
Press Enter.
5.
In the popped up window make a copy of the Studies folder with all its contents.
6.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Type regedit.
4.
Press Enter.
5.
Note:
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 64 bit studies is HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TS
Support\MultiCharts64;
For 64 bit Windows the path to MultiCharts 32 bit studies is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\TS Support\MultiCharts;
6.
Log files
There is no need to backup your logs unless the file contain information regarding an issue (see MultiCharts Logs).
To change the logs folder location:
470
1.
2.
Select Run.
3.
Type regedit.
4.
Press Enter.
5.
6.
Close all MultiCharts products and make sure all it processes are ended. See MultiCharts Processes.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Note: Take into account that if you use a 32-bit version of MultiCharts then use "gbak_x32.bat". If you use a 64-bit
version of MultiCharts then use "gbak_x64.bat".
7.
This procedure can be used to reduce the size of your database and to transform the files from any version
prior to MultiCharts 8.0 Beta 1 to be used in any MultiCharts 8+ versions (example: from MC 7.4; MC 7.2; MC 7.0;
MC 6.2 and earlier to MC 8.0). After the .bat file is used, the database files can be used both in MC 32-bit and in MC
64-bit.
2.
Database files from any 32-bit version, starting with MultiCharts 8.0 Beta 1 can be used in any 64-bit version,
starting with MultiCharts 8.0 Beta 1 and vice versa without any transformation.
3.
If the database size is more than 4 gb, to avoid possible problems do not export all instruments from
QuoteManager, because it may hang the software. Use the steps from above.
471
Internet connection problems. Please check your Internet connection. If you have a proxy setup, please
configure it properly (see more info here - How to Configure a Proxy Connection).
2.
Anti-virus or firewall connection is blocking MultiCharts authorization. Please try to temporarily disable your
anti-virus and firewall software and see if it solves the issue. Also, please make sure that MultiCharts has access
to https://mcauth.com/''', https:// mcauth1.com/ ''', https:/ /mcauth2.com/ ''' servers and Port # 80 is open. You
can try to open www.mcauth.com page in your browser and if you can see a picture of a plant and Well Have
More Soon text, you should be able to connect to DRM system.
If the problem persists, please contact MultiCharts Support.
Authorize MultiCharts with your registration name and code on PC#2 first;
2.
Switch MultiCharts to offline mode (MultiCharts -> File tab->Preferences->Data server mode-> Offline);
3.
Disable Internet connection on this PC or right click on Authorization button in the bottom right corner of the
main MultiCharts window, go to Proxy settings, check "Use HTTP Proxy to authorize, type in any information into
the Host and Port fields, click Ok.";
4.
Start MultiCharts on PC#1 in Online mode(MultiCharts -> File tab->Preferences->Data server mode-> Onine ).
Example: TradeStation is launched "as administrator" by default always. MultiCharts is not. It means that to work
with TradeStation data feed, MultiCharts should be run by right-click and then the "run as administrator" option
should be selected. However, if after that you run QuoteManager for instance by double click, you will get the error
message.
Once a part of MultiCharts is launched with administrative rights (right-click on the icon -> run as administrator), all
other MultiCharts parts should be launched the same way.
Note: If MultiCharts is launched with "as administrator" QuoteManager or PowerLanguage Editor can be launched
with administrative rights too by going to File in MultiCharts main menu, then New -> ...
A single data request cannot return more than 2000 seconds of historical data at once;
2.
If a large amount of data is requested in MultiCharts, a "Pacing Violation" message will be shown in the Event Log
of QuoteManager window.
It means that the amount of the requests for data exceeds the limitation set by Interactive Brokers. To avoid this
situation, please request less data. It is not recommended to request more than 1 day of tick data at once from
Interactive Brokers in order to avoid this problem in the future.
In case if this error occurs, it is recommended not to request more data in MultiCharts and not to change data range
for existing charts for at least 10 minutes. Alternatively, IB Trader's Workstation can be restarted.
Is there a TPO or Market Profile indicator in MultiCharts?
MultiCharts Logs
MultiCharts log files can be used by MultiCharts Technical Support team to explain an unexpected behavior of the
software or its functions when situation is not clear and it requires further deep analysis. Logs together with
473
screenshots, videos, workspaces, exported scripts and exported symbols can be also reviewed for investigation of
the reported issues.
Note: MultiCharts logs should not be analyzed by anyone not related to MultiCharts tech. support to judge on a
particular program behavior and to find a solution.
2.
3.
MultiCharts ( folder ).
4.
Note: In some cases the "Logs" icon may look like an unknown file due to your OS configuration. In most cases after
repair of MultiCharts the icon returns the correct view (folder).
MultiCharts Logs
5.
In the opened window one can find folders with log files.
Note: Log files of some supported brokers in MultiCharts (for example: Trading Technologies and others) or special
extended logs are located in the folder 1 level up. Please, go 1 level up and follow the next step of the instruction to
have all log files covering any possible issue.
6.
Select all folders and files (except Cache folder) right-click on any of them Send to Compressed zip
folder.
7.
MultiCharts Processes
Sometimes you need to restart MultiCharts. If one closes MultiCharts and restarts it too quickly, some of MultiCharts
processes may have no time for correct shutdown. After MultiCharts and all of its applications (i.e. MC,
QuoteManager, PL editor, ...) are closed, it is recommended to make sure that all processes are ended in the
Windows Task Manager:
1.
ATCenterServer.exe
2.
Fixserver.exe
3.
MultiCharts.exe
4.
MessageCenter.exe
5.
PLEditor.exe
6.
QuoteManager.exe
7.
StudyServer.exe
8.
TradingServer.exe
9.
TSServer.exe
Note:The list of the processes your MultiCharts is currently running can be extended depending on the data feed
and broker you are currently using.
1.
CQGServer.exe
2.
CQFServerProxy.exe
3.
FXCMServerProxy.exe
4.
OECServer.exe
5.
OECServerProxy.exe
6.
LMAXServerHost.exe
7.
PATSServer.exe
8.
PATSWrapper.exe
9.
Stunnel.exe
10. TPserver.exe
11. ZfServer.exe
12. ZfServerProxyV3.exe
Note: All processes can be found by sorting the Task Manager Processes tab by the description column. All of them
have MultiCharts in the decription, except for ATCenterServer.exe
475
Chaos Alligator
Chaos Awesome Oscillator
Chaos Fractals
Chaos Gator
Comm Channel Index
Comm Sel Index
Consecutive Downs
Consecutive Ups
Correlation
Count Criteria PB
Count Criteria SM
Crossovers per Bar
Crossunders per Bar
Cust Gradient- Bnd
Cust Gradient- Unbnd
Custom 1 Line
Custom 2 Lines
Custom 3 Lines
Custom 4 Lines
Custom PaintBar
Custom ShowMe
Data
Day of Week
Day Open-Hi-Lo Lines
Day Open-Hi-Lo RT
Detrended Price Osc
DMI
Ease of Movement
Expiration
First Bar of Day
First Bar of Month
First Bar of Week
First Bar of Year
Floating Text
Floor Trader Pivots
Formula OHLC
Gap Dn Bar
Gap Up Bar
Gapless Bar Chart
Head b26 Shoulders
HPI
Impl Volty- 1 Option
Inside Bar
Island Reversal Dn
Island Reversal Up
477
Keltner Channel
Key Reversal Dn
Key Reversal Up
Linear Reg Curve
Linear Reg Line MACD
MACD Gradient
Market Thrust
Marney Range Indicator
Marney Volume Indicator
Mass Index
McClellan Osc
Mkt Facilitation Idx
Momentum
Momentum Decreasing
Momentum Increasing
Money Flow
Mov Avg 1 Line
Mov Avg 2 Lines
Mov Avg 3 Lines
Mov Avg Adaptive
Mov Avg Crossover
Mov Avg Envelopes
Mov Avg Exp Ribbon Mov
Avg Exponential
Mov Avg Triangular
Mov Avg Weighted New
High for Chart
New High for Day
New High for Month
New High for Week
New High for Year New
Intraday HiLo New Low
for Chart
New Low for Day
New Low for Month
New Low for Week
New Low for Year
New N-Day HiLo
Next 3rd Friday
OHLC Yesterday
On Balance Volume
Open Interest
Option Delta
Option Gamma
Option Price
478
Option Theta
Option Vega
Outside Bar
Parabolic SAR
Pennant Brkout
Pivot High
Pivot Low
Pivot Rev Gen - Dn
Pivot Rev Gen - Up
Price < Avg
Price > Avg
Price Channel
Price Osc
Price Reversal
Price Volume Trend
Rate of Chg
RSI
Spread - Diff
Spread - Ratio
Standard Error Bands
Stochastic Fast
Stochastic Slow
Stochastic SlowK
Swing Index
Time Series Forecast
TrendLines Automatic
TRIX
Typical Price
Ulcer Index
Ultimate Osc
Volatility
Volatility Std Dev
Volume
Volume Avg
Volume Brkout
Volume Dn
Volume Gradient
Volume Osc
Volume Rate of Chg
Volume Ratio
Volume Today
Volume Up
VWAP reset
Weighted Close
479
ZigZag % ZigZag
Pnts
Auto Trading Signals:
!From Broker To Strategy MP Synchronizer!
!From Strategy To Broker MP Synchronizer!
!optimize by sharp ratio!
_Historical Entry
_Percent Exit Pair
_Single 1dir Rnge En
_Single 2dir Rnge En
_Single At-Mrkt En
_Single StpOrLim En
_Stops & Targets
_StpOrLim Exit
ATR Trailing LX
ATR Trailing SX
ATR Trgt & Trail LX
ATR Trgt & Trail SX
Bollinger Bands LE
Bollinger Bands SE Breakeven
Stop
Breakeven Stop LX
Breakeven Stop SX
Channel Breakout LE Channel
Breakout SE
Channel Trailing LX Channel
Trailing SX
Close at End of Day
Consecutive Downs SE
Consecutive Ups LE Custom
Strategy LE Custom
Strategy LX
Custom Strategy SE
Custom Strategy SX
Dollar Trailing
Dollar Trailing LX
Dollar Trailing SX
EntryBar $ Stop LX
EntryBar $ Stop SX
EntryBar ATR Stop LX
EntryBar ATR Stop SX
EntryBar Pnt Stop LX
EntryBar Pnt Stop SX
Gap Down SE
480
Gap Up LE
Inside Bar LE
Inside Bar SE
Keltner Channel LE
Keltner Channel SE
Key Reversal LE Key
Reversal LX
Key Reversal SE
Key Reversal SX
MACD LE MACD SE
Momentum LE Momentum SE
MovAvg Cross LE MovAvg
Cross LX
MovAvg Cross SE
MovAvg Cross SX
MovAvg2Line Cross LE MovAvg2Line
Cross SE MovAvg3Line Cross LE
MovAvg3Line Cross SE
New High LE
New Low SE
Outside Bar LE
Outside Bar SE
Parabolic LE
Parabolic SE
Parabolic_m Trail LX
Parabolic_m Trail SX
Percent Stop LX Percent
Stop SX
Percent Trailing
Percent Trailing LX
Percent Trailing SX
PercentR LE
PercentR SE
Pivot Extension LE
Pivot Extension SE
Pivot Reversal LE Pivot
Reversal SE
Price Channel LE
Price Channel SE
Profit Target
Profit Target LX
Profit Target SX
Profitable Closes LX
Profitable Closes SX
481
RSI LE
RSI SE
Stochastic Slow LE
Stochastic Slow SE
Stop Loss
Stop Loss LX
Stop Loss SX
TimeExit (Bars) LX
TimeExit (Bars) SX
TimeExit (Calndr) LX
TimeExit (Calndr) SX
Trendline LE
Trendline SE
Volty Expan Close LE
Volty Expan Close LX
Volty Expan Close SE
Volty Expan Close SX
Volty Expan Open LE
Volty Expan Open SE
At the bottom right corner of MultiCharts there is an indicator to show current connection status to MultiCharts
authorization server. If it is green, the connection is established and your registration name (usually customer first
and last name, all lower case) and registration code (16 digits that should not be mixed with MultiCharts User ID) is
verified, as the result it is possible to receive data from connected data source. Red or yellow means you cant
receive data. Possible reasons:
At the top of the software there is the Trade Bar (shown by default), where all Broker Profiles are located. Each
of them has an indicator that is showing current connection state to a particular broker. Connection to a data source
and to a broker is separated in MultiCharts. It is important to understand that connected status (green) has nothing
482
in common with plotting data in MultiCharts. However, it is required to be connected for receiving prices in DOM
window, Chart Trading Panel and Trade Bar.
Online/Offline Mode
MultiCharts can be running either in online mode that allows user to receive real-time and historical data from data
vendors servers, or customer can work in offline mode to develop studies and strategies and backtest them on
locally saved historical data. There are 3 key points customer should know about modes of MultiCharts:
It is not possible to receive any data from your data source in offline mode.
Offline/Online mode affects not only MultiCharts; it affects tsserver.exe process that is responsible for data in
the software, so selected mode will be common for MultiCharts, QuoteManager and Portfolio Backtester.
It is possible to change tsserver.exe mode only when the following conditions are met:
QuoteManager and Portfolio Backtester are not running, only MultiCharts is launched;
File;
2.
Preferences;
3.
Note: If Download Missing Historical Data box is checked, MultiCharts will receive requested historical data from
data vendors servers, if the data is not previously stored in MultiCharts database. If the box is not checked, only
real-time data will be received.
To learn more about how data is saved to MultiCharts database, read this article.
FXCM data;
483
Troubleshooting
Missing Historical Data on Charts
Before checking the settings in MultiCharts, it is recommended to check the historical data availability in data
vendor's software. In case historical data is not coming from data vendors server in MultiCharts, please check the
following settings:
1.
The software is in Online mode and Download Missing Historical Data box is checked;
2.
3.
4.
5.
Merging is not checked until it is required (should be used only for merging 2 different data sources into 1
single chart);
6.
7.
8.
9.
The Data Range of the chart is correct (compare to point 3 and 5);
10. Windows date and time corresponds to current date and time for the selected time zone;
11. Reload the chart by pressing CTRL+R on your keyboard (when chart window is active) or by going to View ->
Reload -> ...
Important information: When the software requests historical data from a data sources server, the returned data is
stored locally in the database (TradeStation data can be saved or not depending the respective setting). If a data
vendor doesnt return historical data for a reason, so-called empty interval is recorded in the database, so
MultiCharts will not fill the gap when the missing data becomes available on data source end (you can check what
data is already stored in the database by making a right-click on the symbols in QM and selecting "Edit Data..."). In this
case customers should reload data manually in MultiCharts: new historical data for the specified period will be
requested; previously stored data and empty intervals will be replaced by new data from server in the local database.
If there is a gap on data series when custom futures is plotted, please make sure the data is available for the
individual contracts used for this custom futures.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Merging is not checked until it is required (should be used only for merging 2 different data sources into 1
single chart);
6.
7.
8.
Windows date and time corresponds to current date and time for the selected time zone;
9.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
485
2 separate chart windows should be plotted with both symbols of a pair on the charts.
On the first chart the symbol A should plotted on subchart 1. The symbol B should be plotted on subchart 2.
2.
On the second chart the symbol B should plotted on subchart 1. The symbol A should be plotted on subchart
On both charts the strategies should be applied that has similar but reversed logic to buy for 1st chart and to
Each signal script should use Global Variables in its script to pass values between the charts.
Example: When on first chart a particular condition for order generation is met and the strategy sends a market
order to go 1 contract long, through Global Variables this strategy informs the other signal on the second chart to
generate a market order to go 1 contract short.
486
Symbol Guide
To get a consistent data in MultiCharts one should add the correct symbol into the QuoteManager base. The detailed
instructions on adding symbols directly from data source can be found here [1]
FUTURES
Each futures market has a ticker symbol that is followed by symbols for the contract month and the year. Symbol
name consists of abbreviation, month code and single/2-digit year.
Examples: ESZ2, EPM12, NQH2
Month Codes
Month Jan Feb Mar April
Code
Futures Symbols
In the table below the correct abbreviations and formatting of the Futures Symbols can be
found. M stands for the MonthCode Y or YY stand for the year.
Name
Interactive
[2] Brokers
Zen-Fire/
[3] Rithmic
DTN
[4] IQFeed
eSignal [6]
CQG
[5]
Open E Cry
[7]
Barchart
[8]
MBTrading
[9]
Trading
Technologies
[10]
In dices
S&P 500
E-mini
ESMY
ESMY
@ES#
@ESMYY
ES #F
EPMYY
ESMY
ESMYY
/ESMY
ESMY
ES MY
487
S&P 500
SPXMY
SPMY
SP#
+SPMYY
SP #F
SPAMYY
SPMY
SPMYY
/SPMY
SPMY
/RFMY
RIMY
RJMYY
/TFMY
TFMY
NQMYY
/NQMY
NQMY
SP MY
@SP#
@SPMYY
Russell 1000
RGMY
RFMY
@RS1MYY
RN #F
RFEMYY
RF-MMY
TFMY
TF
FMM00YY!
@TFS#
TF #F
TFEMYY
RLM-MMY
@TFSMYY
TF MY
@NQ#
NQ #F
E-mini
Russell 2000
E-mini
Nasdaq 100
NQMY
NQMY
E-mini
DJIA E-mini
@NQMYY
YMMY
YMMY
@YM#
@YMMYY
NQMY
NQ MY
YM #F
YMMYY
YMMY
YMMYY
/YMMY
YMMY
YM
MY
Cur rencies
Euro FX
6EMY
6EMY
@EU#
6E #F 6E EU6MYY
MY
6EMY
6EMYY
/6EMY
6EMY
@JY#
@JYMYY
JY #F
EJYMYY
6JMY
JYMYY
/JYMY
JYMY
@BP#
BP #F
BP6MYY
6BMY
B6MYY
/6BMY
6BMY
@EUMYY
Japanese
6JMY
6JMY
Yen
British
6BMY
6BMY
Pound
Australian
@BPMYY
BP MY
6AMY
6AMY
@ADMYY
6A #F
6A MY
DA6MYY
6AMY
A6MYY
/6AMY
6AMY
6NMY
6NMY
NZD#
6N #F
6N MY
NE6MYY
6NMY
N6MYY
/6NMY
6NMY
6CMY
6CMY
@CD#
6C #F
6C MY
CA6MYY
6CMY
D6MYY
/6CMY
6CMY
6SMY
6SMY
@SF#
SF6MYY
6SMY
S6MYY
/6SMY
6SMY
DXEMYY
DX-MMY
DXMYY
/DXMY
CLMYY
GCLMY
CLMYY
/CLMY
CLMY
NGMYY
GNGMY
NGMYY
/NGMY
NGMY
Dollar
New
JY MY
Zealand
Dollar
Canadian
Dollar
Swiss Franc
SF #F
SF MY
U.S. Dollar
DX
FMM00YY!
Index
@DX#
DX #F
DX MY
En ergies
Crude Oil
Natural Gas
CLMY
NGMY
CLMY
NGMY
QCL#
QCLMYY
CL #F
+NG#
+NGMYY
NG #F
CL MY
NG MY
Tick data.
The following chart resolutions and chart types are plotted out of tick data in MultiCharts:
N tick.
N contract.
N point (range).
N change.
N second.
N range.
Minute data.
The following chart resolutions are plotted out of minute data in MultiCharts:
N minute.
N hour.
Daily data.
The following chart resolutions are plotted out of daily data in MultiCharts:
N day.
N week.
N month.
N quarter.
N year.
Note: IQFeed data source has an option to request only tick data to build all other resolutions only out of ticks (see
IQFeed).
2.
489
2.
Depth of Market data should be supported by a data vendor and you should be subscribed to it.
Note: In some cases (Interactive Brokers) if there is no subscription to Depth of Market data the best Bid and best
Ask may be used to plot only 1 level in DOM window in MultiCharts.
2.
The data vendor must also be a supported broker in MultiCharts.Example: Even though IQfeed provides
Depth of Market data, there is no way a customer can have DOM window with IQFeed data in MultiCharts,
because IQFeed is not a broker.
DOM can be created in MultiCharts using the following data vendors/brokers:
490
CQG
Interactive Brokers
IWBank
LMAX
MB Trading
MIG Bank
Open E Cry
Patsystems
TradeNode
Trading Technologies
Note: FXCM can't feed DOM window in MC, because there is no such data feed in MultiCharts as "FXCM" (see MCFX
for more details).
Dukascopy can't be used to plot DOM window in MultiCharts.
Master account
The distinguished feature of those accounts is the presence of subaccounts. Customers with FA, or Master, or
Friends and Family accounts may notice that when MultiCharts is connected to IB data source/broker with such
account type, all subaccounts are constantly changing in IB TWS. There is a reason for this. FA/Master/Friends and
Family account doesn't allow any 3rd party software to access all subaccounts at the same time to get updated
information about account balance, open market positions, active orders and so on. That is why MultiCharts has to
switch them constantly in IB TWS to update info on all accounts.
Note: This doesn't affect data feed.
Note: Old versions of MultiCharts may have an issue showing similar behavior without FA or Master account
connected. Update your MultiCharts at least to version 8 to fix the issue..
2.
3.
4.
5.
Run MultiCharts.
491
6.
7.
A message from IB TWS should pop up. Check the box Rememeber my decision and click on No.
The order was rejected either by MultiCharts, or by broker (in most cases you can find the reason of rejection
The order was cancelled from script. According to logic of EasyLanguage/PowerLanguage, an order will be
maintained as long as the conditions for its generation are met on each calculation. Once a condition is not met, it
will be cancelled.
date
is
",
DateToString(DateToJulian(Date)),
",
time
is
",
Backtesting with bar Magnifier on tries to execute orders only on OHLC prices of the detailed data series.
MultiCharts acts like if there were no other prices in-between (between O and H, between H and L etc.). Therefore
the signal is calculated at least (4 * number of details series bars + Open and Close of the main series) times on one
bar. I.e. if Bar Magnifier is set to 1 minute on a 5 minute chart, the signal will be calculated up to 22 times (4 * 5
+2) per bar.
In Data Playback mode (as well as in real-time calculation) MultiCharts tries to execute orders on every tick
that is received, on Close price. I.e. if Bar Magnifier is set to 1 minute on a 5 minute chart, the signal will be
calculated only 5 times per bar.
If BarMagnifier is disabled, in Backtesting the signal is calculated on OHCL prices and Multicharts "thinks" that
prices between OHLC exist. Average number of calculations = BarCount * 4 + local minimums and maximums.
If BarMagnifier is enabled, in Backtesting the signal is calculated on OHCL prices of the detailed data series
and Multicharts "thinks" that prices between OHLC of the detailed data series do not exist. Average number of
calculations = BarCount * (detailed series size * 4 + (Open + Close of the main series bar)).
Thus, the number of calculations and available prices differ significantly. This leads to different results.
When BarMagnifier is enabled, Data Playback calculation does not take into account local extremums and additional
Open and Close prices of the main series bar.
493